323-1701-201 2 r11 2 PDF

565/5100/5200
Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,

Part 2 of 2
Release 11.2
What’s inside...
Connecting power
Installing peripheral cables
Installing circuit packs
Fiber management
Cleaning connectors
Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste
See Part 1 for the following:

Observing safety guidelines
Preparing for installation
Installing a rack (19-inch or 23-inch)
Installing 5200 shelves and equipment
Installing Optical Multiservice Edge 1110 equipment
323-1701-201 - Issue 2 Standard

September 2012
Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
Ciena® Confidential and Proprietary

LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA CORPORATION
AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE OR DISCLOSE ITS
CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION,
DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE
AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to
in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change
without notice.
Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and other
countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored in a data
base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena
Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com

Customer Technical Support/Warranty
1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)
In North America
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
and Africa +44-207-012-5508
800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
In Asia-Pacific +81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
In Caribbean and Latin 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
America 410-865-4944 (USA)
Sales and General Information 410-694-5700 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-124-434-0500 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
877-CIENA-TD (243-6283)
Training E-mail: techtng@ciena.com
or 410-865-8996
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Release 11.2 323-1701-201 Standard Issue 2
Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation September 2012
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION ("Ciena") SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION
(COLLECTIVELY, THE "EQUIPMENT").
BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees, Ciena
grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the "Software") in object code form
solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the Software solely
for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation solely for backup
and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary rights notices that
appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense, assign, sell, rent, lend,
lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or documentation not expressly
authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to do the same; (iv) create
derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain the source code of the
Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or labels on or embedded within
the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy
Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy proceeding. Sole title to the Software
and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its
licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the Software and documentation not expressly granted
to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any
original or copies of the Software or documentation.
2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you
shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure
compliance with this Agreement.
3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information ("Confidential Information")
in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential Information
to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was disclosed, use your
best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or use, and must treat it
with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than reasonable care. You
acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or copyrighted materials of
Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this Agreement.
4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical
data (collectively "Materials") are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. These
Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement
227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is further restricted
by this Agreement.
5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by
giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation. Ciena
may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of termination
in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up other than
voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into liquidation or
bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the Software or any
copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in its possession or
control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been destroyed or erased.

6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to obtain
all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical data, is
subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and
may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such
regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software.
7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE AMOUNTS
PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION
ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS,
DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE
8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights
in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties delegated
by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of
Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of Maryland. The
U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This Agreement constitutes
the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and
supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the
parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force
and effect.

v
Contents 0
About this document ix
Connecting power 6-1

List of procedures
6-1 Connecting power leads to the power cards using ring lugs 6-5
6-2 Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier 6-13
6-3 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier 6-17
6-4 Connecting alternating current power to a 2U AC rectifier 6-23
6-5 Connecting wires to direct current outputs of a 2U AC rectifier 6-28
6-6 Connecting alternating current power to a 1U AC rectifier 6-33
6-7 Connecting direct current power cable outputs from a 1U AC rectifier 6-39
6-8 Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk switch 6-43
6-9 Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf 6-47
6-10 Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP) NTN458RA 6-54
6-11 Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP) NTK599DA or fuse panel
NTK599EA 6-59
6-12 Connecting power to an Ethernet hub 6-72
6-13 Connecting power to an Equipment Inventory Unit 6-77
6-14 Testing the 5200 shelf power connections 6-81
Installing peripheral cables 7-1

List of procedures
7-1 Connecting shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm
system 7-4
7-2 Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier 7-10
7-3 Connecting an external power alarm to a 2U AC rectifier 7-13
7-4 Assigning and monitoring alarms on a 2U AC rectifier 7-19
7-5 Connecting an external power alarm to a 1U AC rectifier 7-21
7-6 Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch 7-23
7-7 Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch 7-27
7-8 Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable 7-33
7-9 Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) 7-37
7-10 Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch
(chained topology) 7-43
7-11 Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5200 shelf using an Ethernet cable 7-54
7-12 Connecting to a data communications network 7-57

vi Contents
7-13 Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel 7-59

7-14 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new
installations 7-78
7-15 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing
installations 7-87
7-16 Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel 7-91
Installing circuit packs 8-1

List of procedures
8-1 Inserting circuit packs 8-4
8-2 Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf 8-7
8-3 Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf 8-9
8-4 Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable
(XFP) module 8-12
8-5 Inserting filler cards 8-24
Fiber management 9-1

List of procedures
9-1 Labeling cables and optical fibers 9-5
9-2 Guidelines for labeling the fibers and cables in an OFA installation kit 9-11
9-3 Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager 9-16
9-4 Guidelines for routing fiber in a equipment drawer equipped with tray
assemblies 9-21
9-5 Routing fibers for optical circuit packs 9-26
9-6 Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack 9-29
9-7 Routing coaxial cables for the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit
pack 9-46
9-8 Routing fibers for an OTR 10G Quad or OTR 10G Quad with Encryption 9-50
9-9 Routing fibers from the OMX (Standard) tray 9-57
9-10 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM 9-63
9-11 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray
or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz 9-68
9-12 Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM
100 GHz 9-74
9-13 Routing fibers for the ECT tray 9-80
9-14 Routing fibers for the OSC tray 9-83
9-15 Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps 9-87
9-16 Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot (for Transponder
Protection Tray, 10 channel, only) 9-91
9-17 Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray 9-93
9-18 Routing fibers for the patch panel 9-100
9-19 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual
taps 9-111
9-20 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM 9-120
9-21 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM
ITU CWDM 9-131
9-22 Routing fiber for the Optical Trunk Switch 9-137
9-23 Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch 9-139

Contents vii
9-24 Routing fibers for the PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz 9-141
9-25 Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler 9-145
9-26 Routing fibers for the C&L Splitter/Coupler 9-149
9-27 Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA 9-153
9-28 Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer 9-157
Cleaning connectors 10-1

Cleaning zones 10-1
List of procedures
10-1 Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex) 10-7
10-2 Cleaning MT-RJ connectors 10-11
10-3 Cleaning MPO connectors 10-13
10-4 Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on
circuit packs 10-15
10-5 Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing 10-19
10-6 Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end 10-25
Appendix A: Applying antioxidant

paste 11-1
Overview 11-1
Guidelines 11-2
Illustrations 11-3
Compression lugs and cables 11-3
Surfaces 11-5

viii Contents

ix
About this document 0

ATTENTION
This document is presented in two parts: Part 1 and Part 2. Each part has its
own table of contents. The table of contents in Part 1 contains topics found
in Part 1 only. The table of contents in Part 2 contains topics found in Part 2
only. Part 2 continues sequential chapter numbering from Part 1.
You are reading Part 2 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,

323-1701-201. This document provides the installation procedures for
565/5100/5200 Advanced Services Platform (565/5100/5200) hardware,
specifically for 5200.
Unless specifically stated otherwise, references to Release 11.2 in the

565/5100/5200 technical publications apply to Release 11.2 and Release
11.21.
The 565/5100/5200 includes the following shelves:

• 5200 shelf
• 5100 shelf
• 565 shelf
Unless specified otherwise, 565/5100/5200 is used throughout the technical

publications to cover any of the three different shelf variants.
Part 1 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components includes:

Chapter 1, “Observing safety guidelines”
Chapter 2, “Preparing for installation”
Chapter 3, “Installing a rack (19-inch or 23-inch)”
Chapter 4, “Installing 5200 shelves and equipment”
Chapter 5, “Installing Optical Multiservice Edge 1110 equipment”

x About this document
Part 2 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components includes:

Chapter 6, “Connecting power”
Chapter 7, “Installing peripheral cables”
Chapter 8, “Installing circuit packs”
Chapter 9, “Fiber management”
Chapter 10, “Cleaning connectors”
Chapter 11, “Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste”
This document provides procedures for installing shelves in a site, and
installing components in a 5200.
This document contains the following information for the 5200:

• safety guidelines
• preparing for installation
• installing shelves and equipment
• connecting power
• installing peripheral cables
• installing circuit packs
• fiber management
• cleaning connectors
Audience for this document

This document is intended for the following audience:
• strategic and current planners
• provisioners
• installers
• transmission standards engineers
• field maintenance engineers
• system line-up and testing (SLAT) personnel
• maintenance technicians
• network administrators

About this document xi
Documentation library for the 565/5100/5200

The documentation library consists of the 565/5100/5200 Technical
Publications.
Technical Publications
The 565/5100/5200 Technical Publications consist of descriptive information
and procedures.
Descriptive information
These documents provide detailed descriptive information about the
565/5100/5200, including:
• system description
• software descriptions
• hardware descriptions
• technical specifications
• ordering information
• TL1 user information
Procedures
These documents contain all procedures required to install, provision, and
maintain the 565/5100/5200 system. The following roadmap lists the
documents in the 565/5100/5200 library.

xii About this document
The following roadmap lists the documents in the 565/5100/5200 library.

OM3923
Planning a Installing, Managing, Maintaining and Supporting

Network Commissioning and Provisioning and Troubleshooting documentation
Testing a Network Testing a Network a Network for 565/5100/5200
Library
565/5100/5200
Data Application
Guide
Provisioning and (NTRN15EA)
Installing 5200 Trouble Clearing
Planning Guide Shelves Operating and Alarm
(NTY410AS) Procedures Part 1 Network Security
and Components, Reference Guide, Dashboard
Part 1 (323-1701-310) Part 1 User Guide
(323-1701-201) (323-1701-542) (323-1421-199)
About the Provisioning and
565/5100/5200 Operating
Installing 5200 Trouble Clearing FIPS Security
Library Procedures Part 2
Shelves and Alarm Policy for
(323-1701-090) (323-1701-310)
and Components, Reference Guide, 565/5100/5200
Part 2 Customer Part 2 (NT0H64BA)
Network Planning
(323-1701-201) Acceptance Testing (323-1701-542)
and Link Engineering
Part 1 Procedures
(323-1701-330) Trouble Clearing
(323-1701-110) Installing 5100
and Alarm
Shelves
Reference Guide,
Network Planning and Components, TL1 Interface, Part 3
and Link Engineering Part 1 Part 1 (323-1701-542)
Part 2 (323-1701-210) (323-1701-190)
(323-1701-110) Trouble Clearing
Installing 5100 and Alarm
Shelves TL1 Interface,
Network Planning Reference Guide,
and Components, Part 2
and Link Engineering Part 4
Part 2 (323-1701-190)
Part 3 (323-1701-542)
(323-1701-110) (323-1701-210)
TL1 Interface, Trouble Clearing
Installing 565
Software and User Part 3 and Alarm
Shelves
Interface, Part 1 (323-1701-190) Reference Guide,
and Components,
(323-1701-101) Part 5
(323-1701-215)
(323-1701-542)
TL1 Interface,
Software and User Commissioning Part 4
Interface, Part 2 Procedures Maintenance and
(323-1701-190)
(323-1701-101) (323-1701-220) Replacement
Procedures
Connection (323-1701-546)
Hardware Description Procedures
Part 1 Part 1
(323-1701-102) (323-1701-221)
Hardware Description Connection

Part 2 Procedures
(323-1701-102) Part 2
(323-1701-221)
Technical Testing and

Specifications Equalization
(323-1701-180) Procedures
(323-1701-222)

6-1
Connecting power 6-
Use the procedures in this chapter to make power connections to all the
component parts of the 5200 system.
Before you begin

Before you begin the procedures in this chapter, make sure that you have
completed the procedures in the “Installing 5200 shelves and equipment”
chapter in this book.
The 5200 system is intended for use in isolated DC return (DC-I) applications,
as there are no features within the system to bond the DC return to
framework/office ground.
Requirements
Table 6-1 lists the tools and materials required to complete the procedures in
this chapter.
Table 6-1
Tools and materials required to make power connections to a shelf
Item Quantity Supplied √
Volt-ohm-multimeter (VOM) 1 no
Wire crimper 1 no
Wire strippers 1 no
Phillips No. 1 screwdriver 1 no
Phillips No. 2 screwdriver 1 no

Phillips No. 8 pan head screws 8-32 x 1/4-in. 4 yes
Flat head screwdriver (slotted) 3/32 in. 1 no
Flat head screwdriver, maximum 2/32” (2 mm) wide 1 no
Torque wrench 1 no
Cable ties and lacing cord 2 no

6-2 Connecting power
Table 6-1 (Continued)

NOMEX paper (to protect power cables over metallic 1 no

edges)
Ring lugs for 10 AWG copper wire as required no
Ring lugs for 12 AWG copper wire as required no
Single-hole (No.6 screw) ring lugs for 12, 14, 16 or 18 8 no

AWG copper wire, depending on the powering wire
size used (for the ETS powering connection)
Dual-hole ring lug for 10 AWG copper wire (for the 2 yes, 1 already
ground connection to ETS dual ground connector) installed on the
ETS shelf, and
the other 1 part of
the ETS
installation kit
24 AWG insulated copper wire as required no
(ETSI equivalent: 0.2 mm2)
–48 V 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (See as required no

Note 1 and Note 2)
0 V 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (See Note as required yes, part of the
1 and Note 2) ETS installation
kit
18 AWG (0.8 mm2, minimum size), 16 AWG, 14 AWG 4 wires for the no
or 12 AWG (3.00 mm2, maximum size) insulated power
stranded or solid copper wire (minimum) (for ETS connections
power connection)
10 AWG (5 mm2) insulated stranded copper wire (for 1 wire for the yes, part of the
the ETS grounding connection) grounding ETS installation
connection kit
AC power cable with an IEC 60320-C19 (male) 1 or 2 no

connector (depending on
(Used to connect the AC power source to a 3U APRS the number of
rectifier unit. For ordering information, see the “Power units installed
cables” on page 13-149 in Network Planning and Link in the chassis)
Engineering, 323-1701-110.)


Ring lugs for 10 AWG cable wire (3U APRS DC power 2 or 4 no

output cables). (depending on
the number of
rectifier units
installed in the
chassis)
3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH). For more 1 or 2 no
information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” (depending on
on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link the number of
Engineering, 323-1701-110. rectifier units
installed in the
chassis)
AC power cable to connect an AC power source to the

2U AC rectifier
10 AWG power cable assembly to connect from the DC

outputs of a 2U AC rectifier
Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 10 AWG power cables. Follow the standard
practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making dc power connections. In ANSI
specifications, the -48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the -48V lead
is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue.
Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make
sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Make sure you know how to handle electronic components
correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect
handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components.
CAUTION
Risk of shelf malfunction
Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any
565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to
565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

Procedure list
ATTENTION
Review the details in “Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste” on page 11-1
before preparing ground cables, power cables, and battery cables, as
applicable.
Table 6-2 lists the procedures in this chapter.
Table 6-2
Power connection procedures
Procedure Page Comments √
6-1 Connecting power leads to the power cards using 6-5

ring lugs
6-2 Connecting alternating current power to a 3U 6-13
APRS rectifier
6-3 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 6-17

3U APRS rectifier
6-4 Connecting alternating current power to a 2U AC 6-23

rectifier
6-5 Connecting wires to direct current outputs of a 2U 6-28

AC rectifier
6-6 Connecting alternating current power to a 1U AC 6-33

rectifier
6-7 Connecting direct current power cable outputs from 6-39

a 1U AC rectifier
6-8 Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk switch 6-43
6-9 Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS 6-47

shelf
6-10 Connecting power to a breaker interface panel 6-54

(BIP) NTN458RA
6-11 Connecting power to a breaker interface panel 6-59
(BIP) NTK599DA or fuse panel NTK599EA
6-12 Connecting power to an Ethernet hub 6-72
6-13 Connecting power to an Equipment Inventory Unit 6-77

6-14 Testing the 5200 shelf power connections 6-81

Procedure 6-1
Connecting power leads to the power cards using ring
lugs
Follow this procedure to connect power leads to an 565/5100/5200 shelf.
Each 5200 shelf has two power cards (A and B) located in the maintenance
panel. Ciena recommends that you use both power cards, and connect two
power sources to each shelf. Use one power source as the primary power and
the other as the backup. With a redundant power supply you can still supply
power to the shelf if the primary source fails.
For more information on 5200 hardware, see Hardware Description,

323-1701-102.
Requirements
Make sure that you
• have the tools and materials required to prepare two sets of power leads,
listed in Table 6-3.
You can attach a maximum of two sets of power leads for each 5200 shelf.
Table 6-3
Tools and materials for preparing power feeds for cards with ring connectors
Volt-ohm-multimeter (VOM) 1 no
10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire as required no
Wire crimping tool 1 no
Wire strippers 1 no
Ring lugs for 10 AWG copper wire 4 no
Phillips No. 8 pan head screws 8-32 x 1/4-in. 4 yes
Cable tie 2 no
Wax string or lacing cord as required no
Torque screwdriver 1 no
Antioxidant paste 1 no
—continued—

Procedure 6-1 (continued)

Connecting power leads to the power cards using ring lugs
• bear in mind the following message
ATTENTION
applicable.
Precautions
DANGER
Risk of personal injury
Make sure you connect a ground wire to the shelf before you
start this procedure. Failure to connect the ground wire can
result in personal injury, damage to the equipment, or both.
CAUTION
Make sure you complete the following procedure correctly. If
the polarity of both power feeds is not the same, you can
damage the electrical components on the shelf.
CAUTION
Make sure that the Power A and Power B Breakers on the
maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position. Failure turn the
Breakers off can result in damage to electrical components on
the shelf.
Routing power cables

When routing power cables, follow these guidelines:
• When facing the frame, route the power cables along the left-hand side
and secure them to the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
• When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX
paper around the cables.
• See Figure 6-1 on page 6-7.
—continued—


Figure 6-1
Routing the power feeds into the maintenance panel (Power A only)
OM3639.jpg
—continued—


Figure 6-2
Ring lugs for the power feed to one 5200 power card
OM0358t
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Make sure both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.
Nominal operating ranges for power connections Measured voltage
Across A (A –48V and A RET) –40V to –60V
Across B (B –48V and B RET) –40V to –60V
Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the
565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical
Specifications, 323-1701-180.
2 Ensure that the power leads that will connect with the 5200 shelf are off.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury and equipment damage
Make sure both power feeds coming from the power
sources are off. Make sure that the Power A and Power
B breakers in the 5200 shelf maintenance panel are in
the OFF (O) position.
3 If the left side of the maintenance panel is not open, loosen the thumbscrews
and remove the cover to access the power cards. See Figure 6-3 on page
6-11.
4 Measure two lengths of 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire.
5 Strip approximately 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the ends of both
10 AWG power feed wires. See Figure 6-4 on page 6-11.
6 Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped wire and inside the
compression lug barrel of the ring lug. Repeat for the other end and ring lug.
7 Insert the wire into the compression lug. Repeat for the other end and ring lug.
8 Crimp the wire to a ring lug on the end of each wire. Repeat for the other end
and ring lug.
9 Open the Power B terminal block by lifting the cover, as shown in Figure 6-5
on page 6-12.
10 Route the B power feed from the left side of the shelf, along the bottom of the
maintenance panel tray, to the connector on the Power B (right) card.
—continued—


Step Action
11 Remove the screws from the terminal block.
CAUTION
Do not route power cables through the vertical fiber
brackets of the shelf. If you route the power cables
through the vertical fiber brackets, you can cause
damage to the fiber-optic cables in the brackets.
12 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the ring lug and input terminals
(–48V and return).
13 Screw the ring lug with the –48 V DC battery voltage into the hole on the right
side of the terminal block labeled –48 V. Tighten the screw to a torque value
of 15 in-lb (173 g-m).
Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 10 AWG power
cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color
polarities when making dc power connections. In ANSI specifications, the
–48V lead is Red. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey.
Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed
in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these
procedures.
14 Screw the ring lug with the battery return into the hole on the left side of the
terminal block labeled RET. Tighten the screw to a torque value of 15 in-lb
(173 g-m).
polarities when making dc power connections. In ANSI specifications, the 0V
return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the 0V return is Blue.
procedures.
15 Route the A power feed from the left side of the shelf, along the bottom of the
maintenance panel tray, to the connector on the Power A (left) card.
16 Remove the screws from the terminal block.
17 Repeat step 12 and step 14 for the second power feed.
18 Make sure that there are no exposed wires from either power card touching
other components and ensure the connections are secure.
—continued—


Step Action
19 If there is any noticeable movement of the contacts

a. Make sure that the lugs are securely fastened to the ends of the wires.
b. Make sure that the lugs are securely fastened to the connectors on the
power card.
20 Apply voltage across the ring lugs and test the ring lugs in each of the terminal
blocks with a VOM. Make sure that the power output and polarity are correct.
The Power indicator lamps of the connected power cards turn red when the
polarity is correct.
21 Close the terminal block cover. Make sure that the single notch on the cover
fully engages the slot on the terminal block.
22 Fasten the power leads to the maintenance tray with a cable tie or wax string.
23 Reattach the left maintenance panel covers.
—end—
Figure 6-3
Removing maintenance panel cover
OM3629
Thumbscrews
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
POWER A POWER B 10BASE-T 2X
ACO
LINK
Figure 6-4
Attaching ring lugs to a wire
OM1324p
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug

Figure 6-5
Terminal block cover
OM0357t
Cover

Procedure 6-2
Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS
rectifier
Follow this procedure to connect alternating current power to a 3U APRS
rectifier (NT0H4311). If using another type of rectifier, consult the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Follow Procedure 7-2 “Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS

rectifier”, in this book, to connect external power alarms to the rectifier
For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description,

323-1701-102.
Requirements
Table 6-4 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure
Table 6-4
Tools and materials for connecting alternating current power to a rectifier
AC power cable with an IEC 60320-C19 (male) 1 or 2 (depending on the no

connector number of units installed in
(Used to connect the AC power source to a 3U the chassis)
APRS rectifier unit. For ordering information, see
the “Power cables” on page 13-149 in Network
Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.)
Screwdriver 1 no
Cable ties as required no
Lacing cord or wax string as required no
3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH). For more 1 or 2 (depending on the no

information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering number of rectifier units
information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning installed in the chassis)
and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.)
—continued—


Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier
Precautions
DANGER
Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on
a rectifier. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you
can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock
The AC rectifiers require that the receptacles of the AC mains
provide a ground/protective earth connection. The
ground/protective earth conductor of the AC power cords
must be connected to this ground/protective earth
connection by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local
and national electrical codes.
DANGER
The NT0H43DB and NT0H43DC AC power cords are
provided with open wires at one end, and therefore require a
plug to be installed for connection of the power cords to the
AC mains. The selection of the plug, and the installation of
the plug, must be performed by a qualified (certified or
licensed) person in accordance with local and national
electrical codes. A hazardous installation may result if the
plugs are not wired correctly. Refer to Table 6-5 on page 6-15
for the pinouts when connecting a plug to the wires.
—continued—


Table 6-5
Pinouts for NT0H43DB and NT0H43DC
Color Designation Description
NT0H43DB (North America)
Solid black L1 Line
Solid white L2 Neutral
Solid green or green/yellow Ground/protective Earth
NT0H43DC (International)
Solid brown L1 Line
Solid blue L2 Neutral
Green/yellow Ground/protective Earth
CAUTION
Protect cables
When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and
secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them.
CAUTION
Locate the AC power cords that provide power to the rectifier in
such a way that the power cords are not subject to wear,
abrasion, sharp edges, foot traffic, extreme temperatures,
moisture, or other adverse wear conditions that may be
detrimental to their long-term integrity. The cords are not
intended for permanent connection to the AC power source by
way of a junction box, but rather must connect to the AC mains
by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national
electrical codes.
—continued—


.
ATTENTION
For redundant power supply, Ciena recommends that both AC circuits be
derived from the same AC phase. Consult your local and national safety
codes if you are considering powering each rectifier from different AC
phases.
Action
Step Action
1 Plug the power cord (IEC 320-C19, female) into the connector marked PS1
on the back of the rectifier chassis. See Figure 6-6 on page 6-16.
2 If you have installed a second rectifier, plug another power cord (IEC
320-C19, female) into the connector marked PS2.
3 Plug the other end of the power cord from step 1 (and if applicable step 2) into
an approved alternating current power source. For approved specifications,
see Table 1-51 in 323-1701-180, Technical Specifications.
4 Route the power cord along the left side of the frame and support it using tie
wraps or lacing cord.
5 Continue by performing Procedure 6-3 Connecting wires to the direct current
outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier on page 6-17.
—end—
Figure 6-6
Rectifier chassis—back view (with rectifier units)
OM0100p

Procedure 6-3
Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U
APRS rectifier
You can connect a maximum of two 5200 shelves to one rectifier. To ensure a
redundant power supply you can connect a single shelf to two different
rectifiers. Use this procedure to connect direct current power cable outputs
from a rectifier (NT0H4311). If using another type of rectifier, consult the
manufacturer’s instructions.

323-1701-102.
Requirements
Make sure that you
• have the tools and materials required for this procedure, listed in Table 6-6
Table 6-6
Tools and materials for connecting direct current power cable outputs from a
rectifier
10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire as required no
Screwdriver 1 no
Torque wrench 1 no
3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH). For more 1 or 2 no

information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering (depending
information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning on the
and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. number of
rectifier units
installed in
the chassis)
—continued—


Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier
ATTENTION
applicable.
Precautions
DANGER
Make sure you connect a ground wire to the 5200 shelf before
you start this procedure. Failure to connect the ground wire can
result in personal injury, damage to the equipment, or both.
DANGER
Make sure that all power to the rectifier, and the power feeds
on the rectifier are off before you make connections. Do not
handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause
personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.
CAUTION
Make sure that the Power A and Power B switches on the 5200
maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position. Failure to turn
the switches off can result in damage to electrical components
on the shelf.
CAUTION
Protect cables
secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them.
Action
Step Action
1 Make sure that the power switches on the rectifier chassis are in the Off
position. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-21.
—continued—


Step Action
2 Remove the access cover to the terminal connector for PS1 at the back of the
rectifier chassis. (For redundant power, also remove the access cover to the
terminal connector for PS2.)
3 Locate the direct current terminal connectors. See Figure 6-10 on page 6-22.
4 If not already done in Procedure 6-1, measure two lengths of 10 AWG
insulated stranded copper wire to reach from the direct current terminal
connectors on the rectifier to the maintenance panel on the 5200 shelf to
which the rectifier will supply power.
Note: For redundant power, measure enough wire to connect the output of
rectifier PS1 to power card A. Then measure enough wire to connect the
output of rectifier PS2 to power card B. Figure 6-8 on page 6-21 shows a back
view of the rectifier chassis.
5 Cut the wires to the required length.
6 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the 10 AWG power cables.
ATTENTION
Two different insulation colors are used for the 10 AWG power cables. Follow the
standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making dc
power connections.
7 Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside
the compression lug barrel of the ring lug (see Figure 6-9 on page 6-22).
Repeat for the other end of the wire and the ring lug.
8 Insert the wire into the compression ring lug. Repeat for the other end of the
wire.
9 Crimp one ring lug to the end of each wire. Repeat for the other end of the
wire.
10 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the ring lug and input terminals
(–48V and return [RET]).
11 For each wire pair, remove the screws for the –48V and 0V (RET) from the
direct current terminal connectors.
12 Connect the –48V 10 AWG power cable to –48V terminal to a torque value of
10 in-lb.
polarities when making dc power connections. In ANSI specifications, the
–48V lead is Red. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey.
procedures.
—continued—


Step Action
13 Connect the 0V 10 AWG power cable to the 0V (RET) terminal to a torque

value of 10 in-lb.
polarities when making dc power connections. In ANSI specifications, the 0V
return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the 0V return is Blue.
procedures.
14 Repeat step 3 through step 13 to connect a second 5200 shelf to a 3U
rectifier.
15 Re-install the access cover for PS1 and run the cable under the bottom of the
access cover as shown in Figure 6-8. (For redundant power, also re-install the
access cover for PS2 and run the cable under the bottom of the access
cover.)
CAUTION
Protect cables
When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap
and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect
them.
16 Route the direct current cables along the bottom of the rectifier chassis to the
equipment rack and secure the cables using lacing cord or tie wraps.
17 Follow Procedure 6-1 to connect the power cables to the power cards. Follow
Procedure 6-2 to connect alternating current power to the rectifier.
—end—

Figure 6-7
3U APRS rectifier chassis–front view with power switches Off
OM1301p
Figure 6-8
3U APRS rectifier—back view with dc power cables connected
OM1302p

Figure 6-9
Preparing a ring lug
OM3593
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug
Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste
on the stripped copper wire and inside
the compression lug barrel.
Figure 6-10
Rectifier terminals for alarm connections
OM0101p

Procedure 6-4
Connecting alternating current power to a 2U AC
rectifier
Use this procedure to connect alternating current (AC) power to a 2U AC
rectifier.
The 2U AC rectifier supports 120, 208, 230, or 240V AC dual feed inputs. A
120V AC dual feed input is sufficient to power a single network element.
208/240V AC dual feed inputs are required to power more than one network
element. Table 6-7 lists wire sizes and fuse/breaker ratings for 2U AC rectifier
supported inputs.
Table 6-7
2U AC rectifier supported inputs
Input feed Nominal AC Max. Wire size Protective Protective

mains input current element element min.
min. rating rating,
poles/positions
per feed
One for Single phase 10 A #16 AWG 15 A 1

each 120V AC
rectifier
Single phase 10 A #16 AWG 15 A 2
208V AC
Single phase 8A #16 AWG 10 A 2

230/240V AC
Requirements
Tools and materials
• AC power cable to connect an AC power source to the 2U AC rectifier
• Phillips No. 1 screwdriver
• cable ties, as required
• lacing cord or wax string, as required
• NOMEX paper (to protect power cables routed over metallic edges)
• manufacturer’s documentation
• engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation documentation
package (IDP) or equivalent site/network engineering plans
—continued—


Connecting alternating current power to a 2U AC rectifier
Precautions
DANGER
Risk of personal injury or death
Make sure that power from both feeds (A and B) is off before
you make connections on a rectifier. Do not work with live
power. Contact with a live AC feed can result in serious injury
or death.
DANGER
Always make sure that the rectifier is grounded before you
connect power feeds. Perform Procedure 4-14 before
continuing with this procedure. Failure to connect the ground
cable can result in personal injury.
DANGER
The AC rectifiers require that the receptacles of the AC
mains provide a ground/protective earth connection. The
connection with a suitable plug in accordance with local and
national electrical codes.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to equipment
Protect power cables when routing over metallic edges by
wrapping and securing NOMEX paper around the cables for
protection.
.
—continued—


CAUTION
Locate the AC power cords that provide power to the rectifier
in such a way that the power cords are not subject to wear,
moisture, or other adverse wear conditions that can be
intended for permanent connection to the AC power source
with a junction box, but rather must connect to the AC mains
with a suitable plug in accordance with local and national
electrical codes.
CAUTION
Risk of fire or damage to equipment
Make sure that this product is connected on a branch circuit
with a rating of 20A or less. Otherwise, you risk a fire or
damage to equipment.
ATTENTION
phases.
Action
Step Action
1 For additional information, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

2 If required, remove the AC cover from the rectifier chassis (see Figure 4-45).
3 Remove the knock-out for wire access on the side of the rectifier chassis (see
Figure 6-11 on page 6-27). Route the AC feeds through the opening.
4 Locate the AC input connections on the right side of the AC input block (see
Figure 6-11 on page 6-27).
5 Thread the AC feeds through the knock-out opening for wire access.
—continued—


Step Action
6 Connect the AC feeds as follows:

a. Connect the AC feed to
— line 1 (connector 1)
— neutral 1/line 2 (connector 2), and
— AC equipment ground (connector 3)
b. Connect another AC feed to
— line 2 (connector 4)
— neutral 2/line 2 (connector 5), and
— AC equipment ground (connector 6)
c. Connect the AC feeds to the ground (identified by green or green/yellow).
7 Plug the AC feeds into an approved AC power source.
8 Re-install the AC cover on the rectifier chassis.
—end—

Figure 6-11
2U AC terminal block connections
OM3883.jpg

Procedure 6-5
Connecting wires to direct current outputs of a 2U AC
rectifier
Use this procedure to connect direct current (DC) power cable outputs from a
2U AC rectifier to any of the following power components as required:
• a breaker interface panel (BIP)
— NTN458RA
— NTK599DA
• a fuse panel
— NTT899GB
— NTK599EA
• a Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA) BIP (NTT899GC)
Note: The input feeds to a BIP or fuse panel can be either from a DC
power distribution system or from the DC output of the 2U AC rectifier.
Requirements
Before you start, make sure that you
• have the following tools and materials:
— power cable assembly, 10 AWG
— a small flat head screwdriver (maximum 2/32” (2 mm) wide (to release
DC connector tension clamp)
— cable ties, as required
— lacing cord or wax string, as required
— torque wrench
— manufacturer’s documentation
—continued—


Connecting wires to direct current outputs of a 2U AC rectifier
Precautions
DANGER
connect power feeds. Perform Procedure 4-14 before
continuing with this procedure. Failure to connect the ground
cable can result in personal injury.
DANGER
Risk of personal injury or death
Make sure that power from both feeds (A and B) is off before
you make connections on a rectifier. Do not work with live
power. Contact with a live AC feed can result in serious injury
or death.
DANGER
connect power feeds. See Procedure 4-14. Otherwise, you
risk an electric shock.
CAUTION
Make sure that the power A and power B switches on the BIP
or EMEA BIP are in the OFF (O) position or that the fuses are
not inserted in the fuse holder of the fuse panel. Failure to turn
the switches off or having fuses inserted can result in damage
to electrical components on the network element.
Action
Step Action
1 For additional information, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

2 Locate the DC terminal connectors on the rear of the rectifier chassis (see L+
and L– in Figure 6-12).
3 Cut off the connectors from the rectifier end of the two 10 AWG power cables
(one 10 AWG power cable for the A feed and one for the B feed).
—continued—


Connecting wires to direct current outputs of a 2U AC rectifier
Step Action
4 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the rectifier end of the 10 AWG power
cables.
5 Bear in mind the instructions in step 6 to step 10 when you insert wires into
DC connectors (see Figure 6-13).
6 Release the clamp tension of the DC connector by inserting a small flat blade
screwdriver into the top of the tool opening of the connector.
7 Push the screwdriver up, away from you.
8 Insert a stripped wire of the 10 AWG power cable into the DC connector.
Make sure that no wire is exposed.
9 Pull the screwdriver down (toward you) and remove from the tool opening.
10 Make sure that the wire holds securely in the DC connector and that no
copper is exposed.
11 Select step a. or step b., as appropriate, and insert the wires of the 10 AWG
power cable into the DC connectors.
Note: Connect one 10 AWG power cable for each of the A feeds (A1– and
A1+) and one for each of the B feeds (B1– and B1+).
a. BIP or fuse panel
— black/white wire to the 0V Return terminal (for A1+ and B1+)
— red wire to the –48V/–60V terminal (A1– and B1–)
b. EMEA BIP
— blue wire to the 0V Return terminal (A1+ and B1+)
— grey wire to the –48V/–60V terminal (A1– and B1–)
12
CAUTION
Protect power cables when routing over metallic edges
by wrapping and securing NOMEX paper around the
cables for protection.
Route the DC power cables along power cable support bracket (above the 2U
AC rectifier) and to the frame. Secure the power cables to the power cable
support bracket at the lances using lacing cord or cable ties (see Figure 4-48).
13 Perform the appropriate procedure to connect the 10 AWG power cables
from the DC outputs of the 2U rectifier to the input terminals of the BIP or fuse
panel.
—end—

Figure 6-12
2U AC rectifier — DC terminal connections
OM3886.jpg

Figure 6-13
Installing a 10 AWG power cable into a DC terminal connector
OM3885.jpg

Procedure 6-6
Connecting alternating current power to a 1U AC
rectifier
Use this procedure to connect alternating current power to a 1U AC rectifier.
For 5200 applications, the 1U AC rectifier supports 208, 220, or 240V AC
single feed inputs. Refer to Table 6-8 for the corresponding wire sizes and
fuse/breaker ratings.
Table 6-8
1U AC rectifier supported inputs
Input Max. current Feed breaker Wire size
208V AC 13.0 A 20 A #12 AWG
220V AC 12.0 A 15 A #14 AWG
240V AC 11.1 A 15 A #14 AWG
Requirements
• AC power cable to connect the AC power source to the 1U AC rectifier.
One or two cables are required, depending on the number of rectifier units.
Table 6-9 provides pinouts for Ciena power cables NT0H43DB/DC.
• screwdriver
• cable ties, as required
• lacing cord or wax string, as required
• NOMEX paper
• manufacturer’s documentation
—continued—


Table 6-9
Pinouts for NT0H43DB and NTOH43DC
Color Designation Description
NT0H43DB (North America)
Solid black L1 Line
Solid white L2 Neutral
Solid green or green/yellow Ground/protective Earth
NT0H43DC (International)
Solid brown L1 Line
Solid blue L2 Neutral
Green/yellow Ground/protective Earth
—continued—


DANGER
a rectifier. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you
can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.
DANGER
The AC rectifiers require that the receptacles of the AC mains
provide a ground/protective earth connection. The
connection by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local
and national electrical codes.
CAUTION
Protect cables
secure NOMEX paper around the cables for protection.
CAUTION
Locate the AC power cords that provide power to the rectifier
in such a way that the power cords are not subject to wear,
moisture, or other adverse wear conditions that may be
intended for permanent connection to the AC power source by
way of a junction box, but rather must connect to the AC mains
by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national
electrical codes.
ATTENTION
phases.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 For additional details, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

2 Remove the AC cover from the rectifier chassis. See Figure 6-14 on page
6-37.
3 Select your next step.
If you are using a Then go to
single AC feed step 4
dual AC feed step 6
4 Connect a shorting jumper between position #2 and position #3 on the AC

panel. See Figure 6-15 on page 6-38.
5 Connect a shorting jumper between position #4 and position #5 on the AC
6 Connect the AC feed to line 1 (position #2), neutral 1 (position #4), and
ground (position #6) on the AC panel. See Figure 6-15 on page 6-38.
Note: When connecting an AC power cord with stranded wire, you must
release the spring-clip terminal with a small screwdriver to accept the wire.
7 For a dual AC feed configuration, connect the other AC feed to line 2
(position #3), neutral 2 (position #5), and ground (position #1) on the AC
8 Connect the AC feeds into an approved alternating current power source.
9 Replace the AC cover on the rectifier chassis.
10 Go to Procedure 6-7 to connect cables to the direct current outputs of the
rectifier.
—end—

Figure 6-14
1U AC rectifier — AC cover removal
OM2987p

Figure 6-15
1U AC rectifier — AC panel
Power rack AC wiring arrangement
Shorting jumpers
(for single AC feeds)
Position # 1 Position # 6
AC ground AC ground
Line 1, neutral 2,
rectifier 1 rectifier 2
Line 2, neutral 1,
rectifier 2 rectifier 1
Note: Rectifier 1 is on the left side as viewed from the

front of the system.

Procedure 6-7
Connecting direct current power cable outputs from a
1U AC rectifier
Use this procedure to connect direct current power cable outputs from a 1U
AC rectifier.
Requirements
Make sure that you
• have the following tools and materials:
— 5200 power cable assembly
— wire crimping tool
— No. 8 AWG power lug kit (NTK599ZE)
ATTENTION
Do not use the compression lugs, #10 - 14 AWG two-hole supplied with the
rectifier kit.
— CO REF ground cable assembly, No.6 AWG (supplied with the

rectifier)
— screwdriver
— cable ties, as required
— lacing cord or wax string, as required
— torque wrench
— NOMEX paper
— heat-shrink tubing, clear, UL VW-1
— antioxidant paste
ATTENTION
applicable.
—continued—


Connecting direct current power cable outputs from a 1U AC rectifier
Precautions
DANGER
Make sure you connect a ground wire to the 5200 shelf before
you start this procedure. Failure to connect the ground wire
can result in personal injury, damage to the equipment, or
both.
DANGER
Make sure that all power to the rectifier, and the power feeds
on the rectifier are off before you make connections. Do not
handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause
personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.
CAUTION
Make sure that the power A and power B is turned off at the
source. Failure to turn the power off can result in damage to
electrical components on the shelf.
Action
Step Action
1 Remove the DC cover from the back of the rectifier chassis. See Figure 6-16
on page 6-42.
2 Locate the direct current terminal connectors. See Figure 6-16 on page 6-42.
3 Cut off the connectors from the rectifier end of the 5200 power cable
assembly, as applicable.
4 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the power cables.
the compression lug barrel of the two-hole lug (from the power lug kit
NTK599ZE). See Figure 6-17 on page 6-42. Repeat for the other end.
6 Insert the wire into the two-hole compression lug (from the power lug kit
NTK599ZE). Repeat for the other end.
7 Crimp the two-hole compression lugs (from the power lug kit NTK599ZE) to
the end of each wire.
8 Insulate the lug barrels with heat-shrink tubing.
—continued—


Connecting direct current power cable outputs from a 1U AC rectifier
Step Action
9 For each wire pair, remove the nuts for the –48V and 0V (RTN) from the DC
terminal connectors.
10 If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lugs and input
terminals (–48V and –0V [RTN]).
11 Connect the –48V 565/5100/5200 power cable to the –48V terminal to a
torque value of 10 in-lb.
12 Connect the 0V 565/5100/5200 power cable to the 0V (RTN) terminal to a
torque value of 10 in-lb.
13 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the ground lugs of the ground
cable, input terminals (–0V [RTN]), and equipment rack ground point.
14 Connect one end of the CO REF ground cable to the 0V (RTN) terminals
using a torque wrench.
Verify that torque has been applied correctly: 20 in.-lb (2.27 N-m).
15 Attach the other end of the CO REF ground cable to the equipment rack.
16 Re-install the DC cover.
CAUTION
Protect cables
When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap
and secure NOMEX paper around the cables for
protection.
17 Route the direct current cables along the top of the rectifier chassis to the
equipment rack and secure the cables using lacing cord or tie wraps.
18 Connect the power cables to the power cards.
—end—

Figure 6-16
1U AC rectifier — DC cover removal and terminal connectors
Figure 6-17
Preparing a two-hole lug
OM3592
Lug barrel
0.5 in.in.
0.25 (13
(7mm)
mm)
Copper wire
Crimp-type
Insulated copper wire
two-hole lug

the compression lug barrel. 0.25 in. (7 mm)
0.5 in. (13 mm)

Procedure 6-8
Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk switch
Follow this procedure to make power connections to the Optical Trunk Switch.
If the site uses a rectifier, you must use a 3U APRS rectifier with the OTS.
To make electrical connections from the Optical Trunk Switch to the power
supply, follow the connector pinout diagram on the back of the module.
For more information on the Optical Trunk Switch, see “Optical Trunk Switch”
in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Requirements
Table 6-10 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure.
Table 6-10
Tools and materials for connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch
14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see as required no

Note:)
Screwdriver 1 no
Note: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow
the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making
power connections. In ANSI specifications, the -48V lead is Red, and the 0V return
is Black. In ETSI specifications, the -48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue.
Figure 6-18 on page 6-44 shows the front panel of the Optical Trunk Switch.
—continued—


Figure 6-18
Front panel
OM0304
Figure 6-19 shows the back panel of the Optical Trunk Switch.
Figure 6-19
Back panel
OM0305p
Precautions
DANGER
an Optical Trunk Switch. Do not handle live wires. If you handle
live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to
equipment, or both.
Action
Step Action
1 Ensure that all power is off before making any power connections to the
Optical Trunk Switch.
Note: The power source providing DC power to the OTS (which must be
turned off) can be either the 3U APRS rectifier or a secondary distribution
panel (SDP). The Power control is controlled using a breaker interface panel
(BIP). By turning the breaker connected to the OTS off, power distribution is
controlled.
2 Locate the power terminal block on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch.
—continued—


Step Action
3 Measure and cut one pair of 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire to reach
from the OTS terminal block connectors (–48V A and +RET A) to the primary
power source.
Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source or
a rectifier.
4 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable (see Figure
6-20 on page 6-46).
the compression lug barrel. Repeat on the other end.
6 Insert the wire into the compression lug. Repeat on the other end.
7 Crimp the wire to the14 AWG single-hole ring lug. Repeat on the other end.
8 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lugs and
the input terminals (–48V and return [RET]) on both sides (A and B).
Across A (A –48V and A RET) –40V to –60V
Across B (B –48V and B RET) –40V to –60V
Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the OTS, see
the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.
10 Connect one end of the A power cables to the primary power source and the
other end to the A power source on the OTS (see Figure 6-21 on page 6-46).
11 Repeat step 3 through step 10 for the B power source on the OTS.
12 Route and secure the OTS power cables along the side of the equipment rack
using lacing cord or tie wraps.
—end—

Figure 6-20
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug
Figure 6-21
Power connections for the Optical Trunk Switch
OM1305p.

Procedure 6-9
Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf
Follow this procedure to make power connections and to ground the
Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf. If the site uses a rectifier, you must use a 3U
APRS rectifier with the ETS. Rectifiers are used to convert alternating current
(AC) power to DC in order to provide –48V DC power to the 5200 system,
when –48V DC power source is not available.
To ground the ETS shelf, use the dual ground connector located at the rear of
the ETS shelf. Figure 6-22 on page 6-49 shows the ETS shelf dual ground
connector.
To make electrical connections from the ETS shelf to the dc power supply,
follow the connector pinout diagram on the 4-pin terminal block located on the
rear of the unit. Figure 6-23 on page 6-49 shows the terminal block. Table 6-12
on page 6-50 lists the power connector pinout.
For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to the Hardware
Description, 323-1701-102.
Requirements
The power supply source for the ETS shelf must meet the ETS shelf power
specifications listed in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.
Note: The ETS is specified for -48Vdc typical, minimum of -40Vdc, max
of –57V DC operation. It is important to note that the ETS maximum power
supply is not –75V DC, as it is for the 565/5100/5200 system.
The 5200 rack must be grounded to the building’s ground system. To ground
the rack, refer to the procedure “Connecting the rack ground to the office
ground” on page 3-14. The ETS shelf must be grounded to the 5200 rack. The
steps to ground the ETS shelf are part of this procedure.
—continued—


Table 6-11
Tools and materials for connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf
18 AWG (0.8 mm2, minimum size), 16 AWG, 14 4 wires for no

AWG or 12 AWG (3.00 mm2, maximum size) the power
insulated stranded or solid copper wire connections
(minimum)
(see Note:)
10 AWG (5 mm2) insulated stranded copper wire 1 wire for the yes, part of
(see Note:) grounding the ETS
connection installation kit
Single-hole (No. 6 screw) ring lugs for 12, 14, 16 8 no

or 18 AWG copper wire, depending on the
powering wire size used.
Dual-hole ring lug for 10 AWG copper wire (for 2 yes, 1

the ground connection to ETS dual ground already
connector) installed on
the ETS
shelf, and the
other 1 part of
the ETS
installation kit
Screwdriver 1 no
Note: Two colors are used to distinguish the lead power cable from the return power
cable. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities
when you make power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red,
and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V
return is Blue.
—continued—


Figure 6-22
Dual grounding point at the rear of the ETS shelf
OM2610p
Figure 6-23
Power terminal block at the rear of the ETS shelf
OM2436t
A -48V RET -48V RET B
—continued—


Table 6-12
ETS Power terminal block pinout (from left to right)
Power supply Pin Function
A –48V Pin for making the electrical connection

from the –48V dc source from supply A
to the shelf.
RET Pin for making the return connection
between the shelf and power supply A.
Center Pin Not used.
B –48V Pin for making the electrical connection

from the –48V dc source from the
supply B to the shelf.
RET Pin for making the return connection

between the shelf and power supply B.
Figure 6-24
Attaching ring lugs
OM3593
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug
Precautions
DANGER
an Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf. Do not handle live wires. If
you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage
to equipment, or both.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Make sure that all power is off before making any power connections to the
Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf.
Note: The power source providing DC power to the ETS (which must be
turned off) can be either the 3U APRS rectifier or a secondary distribution
panel (SDP). The power control must be controlled using a breaker interface
panel (BIP). By turning the breaker connected to the ETS off, power
distribution is controlled.
Grounding the ETS shelf
2 Locate the dual ground connector point on the back of the Enhanced Trunk
Switch (see Figure 6-22 on page 6-49). To locate the dual ground connector
on the ETS shelf, look for this symbol.
3 On the ETS dual ground connector, the dual-hole ring lug is already attached.
Unscrew both screws and remove the dual-hole ring lug to be able to attach
a wire to it.
4 Measure and cut one 10 AWG insulated stranded or solid copper wire to
reach from the ETS ground connector and the 5200 rack grounding point.
6-24 on page 6-50).
7 On one end, insert the wire into 10 AWG single-hole ring lug connector (see
Figure 6-24 on page 6-50). On the other end, insert the wire into a 10 AWG
dual-hole ring lug connector.
8 On both ends, crimp the wire to the lug.
9 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the ring lugs and the metallic
grounding strip that connects to the system grounding point of the 5200 rack.
10 Connect the dual-hole ring lug of the earth wire to the two ETS ground
connector pins and tighten the screws.
11 Attach the other end of the earth wire to the 5200 rack grounding point. To
locate the 5200 rack grounding point (see Figure 6-25 on page 6-53).
—continued—


Step Action
Making the power connections to the ETS shelf

12 Locate the power terminal block on the back of the Enhanced Trunk Switch
(see Figure 6-23 on page 6-49).
13 Loosen the screws that secure the plastic cover over the power terminal
block. You do not have to completely remove the screws to remove the cover.
14 After you loosen the screws, slide the plastic cover off the power terminal
block.
15 Measure and cut one pair of 18, 16, 14 or 12 AWG insulated stranded or solid
copper wire to reach from the ETS power terminal block connectors (–48V
and RET on the A side) to the primary power source.
a rectifier.
6-24 on page 6-50).
18 Insert the wire into the 18, 16, 14 or 12 AWG single-hole ring lug connector.
19 Make sure that both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.
Across A side (–48V and RET) –40V to –57V
Across B side (–48V and RET) –40V to –57V
Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the ETS, see
the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.
20 Using a screwdriver, loosen the retaining screws below the pins marked –48V
and RET on the A side of the power terminal block.
21 If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lug connector
and input terminals (–48V and –0V [RTN]).
22 On the A side, attach the end of one wire to the pin marked –48V and another
to the pin marked RET.
23 Connect the ends of the power wires from the A side to the appropriate
connectors on the power supply.
24 Repeat step 15 to step 23 for the B power source on the ETS.
25 Slide the plastic cover into place over the power terminal block.
26 Tighten the screws to secure the plastic cover to the unit.
—continued—


Step Action
27 Route and secure the ETS power and grounding cables along the side of the
equipment rack using lacing cord or tie wraps.
28 You can now turn on the power to the ETS shelf.
Note: The power A and power B LEDs on the front of the ETS shelf are lit.
—end—
Figure 6-25
Grounding point on the 5200 rack (side-front view of the rack)
OM3663.jpg

Procedure 6-10
Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP)
NTN458RA
Use this procedure to connect power to the breaker interface panel (BIP) -
NTN458RA. For more information on 5200 hardware, see Hardware
Precautions
DANGER
a breaker interface panel. Do not handle live wires. If you
handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to
equipment, or both.
Requirements
Before you start, make sure that you have the following tools and materials.
Tools and materials

• crimp tool and wire stripper (wire cutter)
• clear heat-shrink tubing (UL94 V-0 rated)
• non-abrasive non-metallic pad (to clean input terminals)
• antioxidant compound
• torque wrench and digital multimeter
• wire strippers
• cable ties
• small flat screwdriver
• cable ties
• electrostatic device (ESD) ground strap
—continued—


Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP) NTN458RA
Action
.
Step Action
Connecting power to the equipment frame (input wiring)

Note: Ensure you follow operating company guidelines when attaching input
wiring.
1 Ensure that the input power is off and that all circuit breakers located on the
front of the BIP are in the OFF (0 position) on both the A and B sides. No
LEDs should be on.
2 Strip approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of insulation from the end of the power
wires (see Figure 6-27 on page 6-58).
the compression lug barrel. Repeat on the other end.
4 Insert the wire into the straight or angled, two-hole compression lug. Repeat
on the other end.
5 Crimp straight or angled, two-hole compression lugs onto copper wires.
Insulate lug barrels with UL94 V-0 rated heat shrink tubing.
6 Remove plastic covers from both pairs of BATT and RTN input terminals.
7 Clean all input terminals with a nonabrasive, nonmetallic pad.
8 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lugs and
input BATT and RTN terminals.
9 Connect lugs to input terminals on back of breaker panel (see Figure 6-28 on
page 6-58 and Figure 6-26 on page 6-57).
Note: Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly:
tighten lugs to 20 in-lb (2.27 Nm).
10 After connecting input lugs to both sides (Sides A and B), supply input power
to Sides A and B.
Both PWR (power) LEDs (A and B) on front panel must light (green).
11 Use a voltmeter to test voltage and polarity at input terminals of breaker
panel.
12 Re-attach plastic input terminal covers.
—continued—


Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP) NTN458RA
Step Action
Testing input power

13 Turn off power to either Side A or B.
14 Verify that corresponding PWR (power) LED extinguishes.
15 Verify that ALARM LED turns red.
16 Repeat step 13 to step 15 on the other side not yet tested.
17 Shut-off all power to the breaker interface panel.
Connecting power to the shelf
18 If you are connecting power to the shelf using ring lugs, then go to Procedure
6-1, “Connecting power leads to the power cards using ring lugs”.
—end—

Figure 6-26
Breaker interface panel (BIP) - NTN458RA
OM3055p
Output
connectors
B A
Rear view
(rotated)
TOP OF PANEL
PWR FUSE
ALM ALARM BAY ALARMS
VIS AUD CONTACTS ACTIVATE
CR
NO NC NC NO C A R
MJ
NC NO NC NO C A R
MN
C C NC NO C A R
5"
Top view
23" bracket
19" bracket
A B
Front view
Output breakers Output breakers
power A power B

Figure 6-27
OM3592
Lug barrel
0.5 in. (13 mm)
Copper wire
Crimp-type
two-hole lug

Figure 6-28
Lug connections on input battery and return terminals
OM2707p
BATT
RTN
Heat shrink
tubing

Procedure 6-11
Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP)
NTK599DA or fuse panel NTK599EA
Use this procedure to connect equipment (output) and input power to the
breaker interface panel (BIP) NTK599DA or fuse panel NTK599EA. For more
information on 5200 hardware, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Precautions
DANGER
a breaker interface panel. Do not handle live wires. If you
equipment, or both.
The input feeds to the BIP (NTK599DA) or fuse panel (NTK599EA) can be
either from a direct current (DC) power distribution system or from the DC
output of the 2U AC rectifier.
Requirements
Before you start, make sure that
• the 20A breakers are installed (see Procedure 4-11)
• the BIP (NTK599DA) or fuse panel (NTK599EA) is installed and grounded
in the bay (see Procedure 4-12)
• you are familiar with the operating company guidelines for input wiring and
that you have a copy of the supplier documentation (shipped with the BIP
or fuse panel)
—continued—


Connecting power to a breaker interface panel (BIP) NTK599DA or fuse panel NTK599EA
Tools and materials

• 8 mm socket (for mixed bay configurations to install high current output
feeds inside the BIP or fuse panel)
• crimp tool and wire stripper (wire cutter)
• clear heat-shrink tubing (UL94 V-0 rated)
• non-abrasive non-metallic pad (to clean input terminals)
• antioxidant compound
• torque wrench and digital multimeter
• wire strippers
• cable ties
• small flat screwdriver
• cable ties
• electrostatic device (ESD) ground strap
Action
Step Action
Note: Make sure that you follow the operating company guidelines when you
attach input wiring.
1
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock or burns
A battery power distribution system constitutes a
significant energy hazard that can result in serious
burns if you do not follow the appropriate procedures
for working with power. Make sure that the circuit
breakers (A and B feeds) in the power distribution path
are switched off.
Make sure that the circuit breakers (A and B feeds) in the distribution panel
are switched off.
—continued—


Step Action
2 Make sure that

• no voltage is on the power cables
• for the BIP, all circuit breakers are in the OFF position on both the A and
B sides
• for the fuse panel, the fuses are not inserted in the fuse holder
3 See the EDP, IDP, or the equivalent site/network engineering plans for details
regarding the number of power feeds and return cables and the routing
scheme.
Preparing to route high current equipment (output) feeds
ATTENTION
If the 5200 terminal product is to be collocated in the same bay with the
Common Photonic Layer product, it is assumed that the PTE2000 rack is
already installed. For details, see the Common Photonic Layer Ciena
Technical Publications library.
ATTENTION
If the 5200 terminal product is to be collocated in the same bay with the
Common Photonic Layer product, then you must install high current
equipment (output) feeds for the 5200 product first (this procedure). For
instructions on connecting power to a BIP (NTK599DA) or fuse panel
(NTK599EA) from a Common Photonic Layer product, see the Common
Photonic Layer Ciena Technical Publications library.

If you are routing equipment Then go to
(output) feeds using
front access step 5
rear access step 13
Installing equipment (output) feeds—Front access

5 Open the drawer of the BIP or fuse panel by unscrewing the thumbscrews on
the front of the BIP or fuse panel.
6 Measure back 8.0 in (200 mm) from the tip of the equipment (output) feeds.
Mark off the measurement on the equipment (output) feeds. This
measurement is a strain relief reference point (see Figure 6-29 on page 6-66).
Perform this step for the A side and the B side.
Note: You perform this step to ensure there is sufficient slack in the cables
so that the drawer can be opened and closed.
—continued—


Step Action
7 Route the A side equipment (output) feeds to the front A side and through the
front opening (see Figure 6-32 on page 6-68).
If you are installing into a Then
PTE2000 rack equipped route the B side equipment (output) feeds
with a top horizontal through the top horizontal support bracket
support bracket and then down to the front opening
PTE2000 rack (without a route the B side equipment (output) feeds
top horizontal support over to the B side and through the front
bracket) opening
19-inch, 23-inch, or ETSI route the B side equipment (output) feeds
frame over to the B side and through the front
opening
9 Perform step 10 to step 12 for side A and side B.

10 Push the equipment (output) feeds into the front opening with one hand and
with the other hand reach into the drawer and pull the equipment (output)
feeds toward the front.
Note: The strain relief reference point (from step 6) must be just outside the
front access opening (see Figure 6-29 on page 6-66).
11 If you are installing into a PTE2000 rack equipped with a top horizontal
support bracket, secure the equipment (output) feeds to the lances inside the
top horizontal support bracket.
12 Use the cable tie on the front opening of the BIP or fuse panel to apply strain
relief to the equipment (output) feeds.
Figure 6-33 on page 6-69 shows the equipment (output) feeds routed using
front access and the input feeds and ground connected on side A.
Then go to step 20.
Installing equipment (output) feeds—Rear access
13 Open the drawer of the BIP/fuse panel by unscrewing the thumbscrews on
the front of the BIP/fuse panel.
14 Route the equipment (output) feeds to the rear side of the BIP/fuse panel.
15 Perform step 16 to step 19 for side A and side B equipment (output) feeds.
—continued—


Step Action
16 Measure back 12.0 in. (304.8 mm) from the tip of the equipment (output)
feeds. Mark off the measurement on the equipment (output) feeds. This
measurement is a strain relief reference point (see Figure 6-29 on page 6-66).
Note: You perform this step to ensure there is sufficient slack in the cables
so that the drawer can be opened and closed.
17 Insert the equipment (output) feeds through the opening at the rear of the
BIP/fuse panel.
18 Guide the equipment (output) feeds to the terminals front of the drawer.
Note: The insertion point that you marked in step 16 must be just outside the
rear access opening (see Figure 6-29 on page 6-66).
19
CAUTION
Risk of power cable malfunction
Make sure that you use the lance on the outside of the
BIP or fuse panel at the rear opening to provide strain
relief. Otherwise, you risk power cable malfunction.
Insert a cable tie through the lance at the rear opening and secure to the
equipment (output) feeds at the 12.0 (304.8 mm) mark insertion point,
described in step 16 (see Figure 6-29 on page 6-66).
When you are routing equipment (output) feeds to the B side, use the lances
along the rear of the BIP/fuse panel to apply strain relief.
Connecting equipment (output) feeds to terminal A and B
20 Match the lugs of the equipment (output) feeds to their respective terminal on
the A and B side.
21 Apply strain relief in two places on the equipment (output) feeds (see Figure
6-34 on page 6-69 to Figure 6-37 on page 6-71).
22
ATTENTION
Make sure that you install the power cable guide, which allows the BIP or
fuse panel drawer to operate correctly.
Install a internal power cable guide (which serves as a bend limiter) through
the rear opening of the BIP/fuse panel (see Figure 6-38 on page 6-71).
Note: Some resistance from the power cables is expected.
—continued—


Step Action
23 Apply moderate force to mate the holes of the internal power cable guide to
the holes at the rear of the BIP or fuse panel. Secure into place using the
screws provided.
24 Close the drawer and secure into place with the thumbscrews.
Routing equipment (output) feeds to the 5200 system
25
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage
electrostatic-sensitive devices. Always connect
yourself to ground before you handle an
electrostatic-sensitive device.
Make sure that you connect your ESD strap to the ESD jack.
26 Route the equipment (output) feeds from the front or rear of the BIP
(NTK599DA) or fuse panel (NTK599EA) down along the rack upright.
27 Take up excess slack in the frame upright as necessary.
Connecting input feeds
Note: The input feeds to the BIP (NTK599DA) or fuse panel (NTK599EA)
can be either from a direct current (DC) power distribution system or from the
DC output of the 2U AC rectifier. To install a 2U AC rectifier, see
Procedure 4-14, “Installing a 2U AC rectifier”.
28 If applicable remove the power landing cover from both sides (A and B).
Remove the nuts from the input terminals (–48V/–60V and the return) on both
sides (A and B).
29 Route the input feeds to the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on both
sides (A and B) of the BIP/fuse panel.
30 Trim the input feeds to length.
31 Strip approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of insulation from the end of the input feed
wires (see Figure 6-30 on page 6-67).
32 Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire of the input
feed and inside the straight two-hole compression lug barrel. Repeat on the
other end.
33 Insert the input feed wire into the compression lug. Repeat on the other end.
34 Crimp the straight two-hole compression lugs onto the input feeds.
Note: The hole spacing is 5/8 in. and the hole size is No.10.
For details, see the EDP, IDP, or the equivalent site/network engineering
plans.
—continued—


Step Action
35 Insulate the lug barrels and the end of the input feeds with clear heat-shrink
tubing (UL94 V-0 rated).
36 Clean the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on both sides (A and B)
with a non-abrasive, non-metallic pad.
37 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the two-hole lugs, and the
input terminals (–48V/–60V and return [RET]) on both sides (A and B). See
Figure 6-30 on page 6-67 and Figure 6-31 on page 6-67.
38
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the KEPS nuts.
Otherwise, you risk damaging the equipment.
Connect the two-hole lugs to the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on
both sides (A and B), and reinstall the KEPS nuts. Torque to a value specified
in the supplier documentation (shipped with the BIP or fuse panel).
39 Secure the input feeds to provide strain relief as required.
If you are installing in a Then use the lances on the
rack not equipped with a mounting brackets on the BIP or fuse panel
top horizontal support (see Figure 6-32)
bracket
PTE2000 rack equipped sides of the horizontal support bracket
with a top horizontal
support bracket
Testing input power

40 Use a digital multimeter set to ohms and make sure that none of the –48V or
–60V feeds are short-circuited to the return feeds.
41 Supply input power to sides A and B.
42 Verify that you have the correct polarity. Use a digital multimeter set to volts
to test voltage and polarity at the input terminals of the BIP or fuse panel.
• The typical float voltage for a nominal –48V system should be from –52V
to –55V.
• The typical float voltage for a nominal –60V system should be
approximately –60V.
Note: If the voltage and polarity are within range but the LEDs do not turn
on, contact your next level of support.
43 Record the voltage and the polarity.
—continued—


Step Action
44 Reattach the power landing cover over the input terminals.

45 Turn off the power to either side A or B.
46 Verify that the corresponding PWR (power) LED extinguishes.
47 Repeat step 45 to step 46 for the side that you did not test.
48 Turn off all power to the BIP or fuse panel.
—end—
Figure 6-29
Rear or front access—measuring strain relief reference point for equipment (output) feeds
(shown: A side only; the same applies to the B side)
OM3808
Rear access
equipment
(output)
feeds
Strain relief
Strain relief reference
reference point point
(insertion point) (insertion
point) 12.0 in
304.8 mm
Front access
equipment
(output) feeds
8.0 in
200.0 mm
High current
equipment
High current equipment (output) feeds for
(output) feeds for 565/5100/5200
565/5100/5200
Low current Low current

equipment equipment
(output) feeds (output) feeds

Figure 6-30
OM3592
Lug barrel
0.5 in. (13 mm)
Copper wire
Crimp-type
two-hole lug

Figure 6-31
Preparing a two-hole lug and an input terminal
OM3595
If appropriate, lightly coat

antioxidant paste on
compression lug and
input terminal

Figure 6-29 shows the A side. In step 6 you measure the strain relief reference
point for the A side and the B side.
Figure 6-32
Front access for output (equipment) feeds and lances on mounting bracket,
BIP/FP (left side)
OM3887.JPG

Figure 6-33
Front access—Equipment (output) feeds, input feeds, and ground shown
OM3888.jpg
Figure 6-34
Cable strain relief points for equipment (output) feeds of power harness (inside
BIP or fuse panel)
OM2910t

Figure 6-35
Equipment (output) feeds – high current
OM3809.jpg
Figure 6-36
Equipment (output) feeds for 5200 in BIP NTK599DA
OM2888t

Figure 6-37
Equipment (output) feeds in BIP (NTK599DA)–A side (mixed bay configuration)
OM3810.jpg
Figure 6-38
Installing an internal power cable guide
CPL0458t

Procedure 6-12
Connecting power to an Ethernet hub
Use this procedure to connect power to the Ethernet hub (NT0H43BB). For
more information on the Ethernet hub, see “Ethernet hub” in Hardware
Requirements
Table 6-13 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure
Table 6-13
Tools and materials for connecting power to the Ethernet hub (NT0H43BB)

14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see as required no
Note )
Single-hole ring lugs for 14 AWG copper wire 4 no
Screwdriver 1 no

Note: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow
the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making
power connections. In ANSI specifications, the -48V lead is Red, and the 0V return
is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue.
Precautions
DANGER
an Ethernet hub. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live
wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or
both.
—continued—


Action
.
Step Action
Preparing power cables

1 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the power cable (see
Figure 6-39 on page 6-75).
the compression ring lug barrel. Repeat on the other end.
3 Insert the wire into the single-hole ring lug. Repeat on the other end.
4 Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug.
5 Repeat step 1 to step 4 for both pairs of 14 AWG power cables (one pair to
connect to the primary power source and the second pair to connect to the
redundant power source).
Connecting power cables
6 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lugs of the
power cables and the input terminals (–48V and 0 V DC [RTN]) on both sides
(A and B).
7 Use one pair of 14 AWG power cables to connect the primary power source
to the A+ (–48 V DC) and A– (0 V DC [RTN]) terminals of the terminal block
Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source, or
a rectifier.
)
DANGER
There is a risk of electrical shock when routing the
power and making the power connections.
8 Use the second set of 14 AWG power cables to route power from the
redundant power source to the B+ (–48 V DC) and B– (0 V DC [RTN])
terminals on the Ethernet hub.
Grounding
9 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the 14 AWG ground cable
wire (see Figure 6-39 on page 6-75).
the compression lug barrel of a single-hole ring lug. Repeat at the other end.
—continued—


Step Action
12 Crimp the wire to a single-hole ring lug. See Figure 6-39 on page 6-75.
13 If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lugs of the
ground cable and the metallic grounding strip that connects to the system
ground point.
14 Make sure that both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.
Across A (A –48V and A RET) 36V to 70V DC
Across B (B –48V and B RET) 36V to 70V DC
Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the

565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical
15 Connect one end of the 14 AWG ground wire to the primary ground on the
Ethernet hub.
Note: The primary ground is on the POWER A side. See Figure 6-41 on page
6-76.
16 Connect the other end of the ground wire to the metallic grounding strip that
connects to the system grounding point.
Securing cables
17 Use cable ties to tie the power cables and ground wire to the equipment rack
as required.
Switching on power
18 Switch the circuit breakers for the primary and redundant –48 V DC power
supplies to the ON position.
Note: For acceptable voltage range, see Table 1-47 in Technical
19 Check that the green power indicator LED (labeled PWR) turns ON.
—end—

Figure 6-39
OM3593
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug
Figure 6-40
Ethernet hub
OM3640
POWER A POWER B 10BASE–T
POWER LINK
A RX
PWR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
POWER
- + -GND+ B
CLEI
48VDC 48VDC
Ground for power B

Power feed B
Ethernet ports 1 to 12
Ground for power A
Power feed A
Note 1: Ethernet cables are routed out through to the

right side of the rack at the front.
Note 2: Ground wires are routed and connected to the
metallic grounding strips on the left side of the rack at the
front.

Figure 6-41
Ethernet hub mounted in the rack
OM3641.jpg

Procedure 6-13
Connecting power to an Equipment Inventory Unit
Use this procedure to connect power to the Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU)
(NT0H43HA). For more information on the Equipment Inventory Unit, see
“Enhanced Trunk Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Requirements
Table 6-14
Tools and materials for connecting power leads to an EIU

14-16, No. 8 stud ring terminal (for power) 4 yes
14 AWG black wire (power) 2 x 9 ft yes
14 AWG red wire (power) 2 x 9 ft yes
14 AWG blue wire (power) 2x 9 ft yes
No.2 Phillips screwdriver 1 no
5/16-inch socket (for hexhead screws) 1 no
Torque wrench 1 no
Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables.
Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when
making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the
0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return
is Blue.
Note 2: Screws on the EIU power terminal block must be tightened to a torque
value of 10 in.-lb.
—continued—


Precautions
DANGER
an Equipment Inventory Unit. Do not handle live wires. If you
equipment, or both.
Action
.
Step Action
1 Ensure that the input power is off and that all circuit breakers located on the
front of the Equipment Inventory Unit are in the OFF (0 position) on both the
A and B sides. No LEDs should be on.
2 Locate the power terminal block on the front of the Equipment Inventory Unit
DANGER
There is a risk of electrical shock when routing the
power and making the power connections.
3 Measure and cut one pair of 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire to reach
from the Equipment Inventory Unit terminal block connectors (–48 A and
RET A) to the primary power source.
a rectifier.
4 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable. Repeat on the
other end.
5 Apply antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the
compression lug barrel of the 14 AWG single-hole ring lug (see Figure 6-43
on page 6-80). Repeat on the other end.
7 Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug (see Figure 6-43 on page 6-80).
—continued—


Step Action
Nominal operating ranges for Measured voltage
power connections
Across A (A –48V and A RET) –40V to –70V (typical is –48V)

Across B (B –48V and B RET) –40V to –70V (typical is –48V)
Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the
Equipment Inventory Unit, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in
Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.
9 If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lug and input
terminals (–48V and –0V [RET]).
10 Connect one end of the A power cables to the primary power source and the
other end to the A power source on the Equipment Inventory Unit.
11 Repeat step 3 through step 10 for the B power source on the Equipment
Inventory Unit.
12 Switch the circuit breakers located on the front of the Equipment Inventory
Unit are in the ON (I position) on both the A and B sides.
13 Check that the green power indicator LEDs (labeled Power A and Power B)
turn ON.
14 Route and secure the Equipment Inventory Unit power cables along the side
of the equipment rack using lacing cord or tie wraps.
—end—
Figure 6-42
Front panel of the EIU
OM3642.jpg

Figure 6-43
Preparing a single-hole ring lug
OM3593
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug

Procedure 6-14
Testing the 5200 shelf power connections
Follow this procedure to test the power connections to the shelf.
Requirements
Remove the cover of the maintenance panel before you begin this procedure.
Action
Step Action
1 Make sure that both power breakers on the shelf are in the OFF (O) position.
2 Apply power to the power feeds that are entering the 5200 shelf.
The Power indicator lamps of the connected power cards turn red.
3 Turn on Breaker A on the maintenance panel.
The Breaker A indicator lamp turns green and the fans of the cooling unit
come on.
4 Turn off Breaker A.
The Breaker A indicator lamp turns red and the fans of the cooling unit go off.
5 Turn on Breaker B on the maintenance panel.
The Breaker B indicator lamp turns green and the fans of the cooling unit
come on.
6 Turn off Breaker B.
The Breaker B indicator lamp turns red and the fans of the cooling unit go off.
—end—


7-1
Installing peripheral cables 7-

Use the procedures in this chapter for the connections required to support
data communications links between network elements in your 5200 network.
Requirements
completed the necessary procedures in the “Installing 5200 shelves and
equipment” chapter of this book.
Three options are available to connect shelves:

• In sites with only two shelves, you can connect the shelves directly using
a cross-over Ethernet cable (Procedure 7-8). In this scenario, the shelves
can be equipped with a Shelf Processor (SP) or an Enhanced Shelf
Processor (eSP).
• You can connect two or more shelves through an Ethernet hub (hubbed
topology) using Ethernet cables (Procedure 7-9). In this scenario, shelves
can be equipped with an SP or an eSP.
— For shelves equipped with an SP, you must use cross-over Ethernet
cables to connect the shelves to the hub and straight-through Ethernet
cables to connect to the data communications network (DCN) device.
(Follow the requirement listed in Table 7-14.)
— For shelves equipped with an eSP, you can use either cross-over or
straight-through Ethernet cables to connect to the hub or to the DCN
device.
• You can connect two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet
switch on the eSP (chained topology) using cross over or straight-through
Ethernet cables (Procedure 7-10). In this scenario, which eliminates the
requirement for an Ethernet hub, shelves must be equipped with an eSP.
For details on the SP and the eSP, see “OSC circuit packs” in Hardware
Description, 323-1701-102. For details on data communications, see “Data
communications in the 565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link
Engineering, 323-1701-110.

7-2 Installing peripheral cables
For a site with one or more DWDM shelves and an OFA shelf, you can
connect the OFA shelf to an adjacent DWDM shelf using an Ethernet cable.
Your system may require an additional LAN connection to enable you to

monitor system management information from another site, depending on
your network configuration.
Precautions
CAUTION
CAUTION
Procedure list
Table 7-1 lists the procedures in this chapter. All procedure lists include a
check box for you to keep track of where you are in an installation. Place a
check mark in this column when you are performing the procedure.
Table 7-1
Data communications connections procedures

7-1 Connecting shelf alarms and telemetry 7-4 Optional.
equipment to the central office alarm
system
7-2 Connecting an external power alarm to 7-10 Required to monitor the power status
a 3U APRS rectifier of the 3U APRS rectifier modules.
a 2U AC rectifier of the 2U AC rectifier modules.
7-4 Assigning and monitoring alarms on a 7-19 Required to assign alarms on a 2U
2U AC rectifier AC rectifier.
a 1U AC rectifier of the 1U AC rectifier modules.
7-6 Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk 7-23 Required to monitor the status of the
Switch Optical Trunk Switch.


Data communications connections procedures
7-7 Connecting alarms on the Enhanced 7-27 Required to monitor the status of the
Trunk Switch Enhanced Trunk Switch.
7-8 Connecting two shelves with a 7-33 Required. Applies to shelves
cross-over Ethernet cable equipped with a Shelf Processor
(SP) or an Enhanced Shelf
Processor (eSP).
7-9 Connecting two or more shelves to an 7-37 Required if you deploy an Ethernet
Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) hub. Applies to shelves equipped
with a Shelf Processor (SP) or an
Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP).
7-10 Connecting two or more shelves 7-43 Required starting in Release 10 if

through an integrated Ethernet switch customer does not want to use the
(chained topology) hubbed topology (Procedure 7-9).
Applies only to shelves equipped
with an Enhanced Shelf Processor
(eSP).
7-11 Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5200 7-54 Required to allow communication to
shelf using an Ethernet cable a remote ETS through the
565/5100/5200 communications
network.
7-12 Connecting to a data communications 7-57 Required to connect the 5200

network network to a data communications
network (DCN).
7-13 Connecting passive devices to the 7-59 Required if you deploy passive
maintenance panel devices.
7-14 Connecting passive devices to the 7-78 Required if you deployed an

Equipment Inventory Unit in new Equipment Inventory Unit in a new
installations installation.
7-15 Connecting passive devices to the 7-87 Required if you deployed an

Equipment Inventory Unit in existing Equipment Inventory Unit in an
installations existing installation.
7-16 Connecting the Equipment Inventory 7-91 Required if you deployed an

Unit to the maintenance panel Equipment Inventory Unit.

Procedure 7-1
Connecting shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to
the central office alarm system
Follow this procedure to connect 5200 shelf alarms, and telemetry equipment
to the central office (CO) alarm system.
The central office alarms and telemetry (COTEL) interface card enables the
alarms generated on the 5200 shelf to be connected to the central office
alarms system. This interface card also allows you to connect telemetry
equipment to the shelf, so that you can monitor and respond to environmental
changes at the site.
When you complete this procedure

• the 5200 shelf is connected to the central office alarms system
• telemetry alarms are connected
• the ferrite bead is attached to the wires
For more information on 5200 hardware, see “5200 shelf” in Hardware

CAUTION
The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for
intrabuilding use only.
Requirements
Table 7-2 lists the tools and materials required to connect the maintenance
panel to telemetry equipment and to the central office alarm system.
—continued—


Connecting shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system
Table 7-2
Tools and materials for connecting the maintenance panel to the central office
alarm system
Miniature slot screwdriver 1 no

24 AWG insulated wire as required no
16-pin connector 2 yes (with shelf installation kit)
Wire strippers 1 no
Ferrite bead 1 yes (with shelf installation kit)
You must remove the left maintenance panel cover to access the connector
of the COTEL card (labelled Telemetry), which is the first card on the left side
of the maintenance panel.
Precautions
CAUTION
Do not remove interface cards from the area behind the
maintenance panel cover. The cards in the maintenance panel
must be removed or replaced by Ciena technical support
personnel only.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the ferrite bead around the wires in the
maintenance panel, to comply with Class B emissions
requirements.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 If the cover of the maintenance panel is not open, loosen the thumbscrews
and remove the left maintenance panel cover to access the interface cards in
the maintenance panel.
2 Locate the COTEL interface card and make sure that the 16-pin socket
connectors are installed. Figure 7-1 on page 7-7 shows a COTEL card with
the 16-pin socket connectors installed.
3 Loosen the retaining screws located at the top and bottom of the COTEL
connector and remove the COTEL connector from the COTEL card.
4 Identify the pins on the connector that you want to connect to. Figure 7-2 on
page 7-8 shows as an example a COTEL card with telemetry connections.
Note 1: For pinout information, see Central office alarm and telemetry
interface in the “Technical specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications,
323-1701-180.
Note 2: The COTEL card is the first interface card on the left side of the shelf.
5 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the first 24 AWG wire that you want to
insert in the connector.
6 Pry the spring clamp open. See Figure 7-3 on page 7-8.
7 Insert the wire 10 mm (0.4 in.) into the bottom of the slot of the socket
connector that corresponds to the signal you want to connect. See Figure 7-3
on page 7-8.
8 Hold the wire in place and release the spring clamp on the side of the
connector to secure the wire. See Figure 7-3 on page 7-8.
9 Repeat step 2 to step 8 for the other connections you want to make.
10 Insert the connector into the connector socket on the front of the COTEL card.
Make sure the wires are routed through the opening in the lower left side of
the maintenance panel. See Figure 7-2 on page 7-8.
11 Insert and tighten the retaining screws at the top and bottom of the connector.
12 Clamp the ferrite around the COTEL wires.
—continued—


Step Action
13 Place the ferrite in the maintenance panel, as shown in Figure 7-4 on page
7-9. When grounding the shelf using a double-hole compression lug, place
the ferrite in front of the telemetry card.
Note: One ferrite should be used until full and then incorporate a second
ferrite as required. The ferrites can be mounted on top of each other, laced
together.
14 Secure the wires from the COTEL connector with a cable tie or lacing cord to
one of the tie-down points in the bottom the maintenance tray.
15 Route the wires from the COTEL connector through the opening in the lower
left side of the maintenance panel. When facing the equipment rack, route
and secure the wires from the connector along the left-hand side of the
equipment rack using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
16 Repeat step 1 through step 15 for the other COTEL connector, if applicable.
17 Replace the left maintenance panel cover.
—end—
Figure 7-1
COTEL card with 16-pin socket connectors
OM0097s
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TELEMETRY
1 17
16 32

Figure 7-2
Telemetry connections on the COTEL card
OM0098t
Figure 7-3
Inserting and securing a wire in the telemetry connector
OM0096t

Figure 7-4
Connecting shelf alarms to the CO alarm system
OM0161t

Procedure 7-2
Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS
rectifier
Follow this procedure to connect an external power alarm from a 3U AC Power
Rectifier Shelf (3U APRS) to the telemetry inputs of the 5200 shelf or external
equipment.

323-1701-102.
ATTENTION
The telemetry alarm port on most rectifiers shipped with the 3U AC Power
Rectifier Shelf kit (NT0H44AH) can be set by the user to normally closed
(NC) or normally open (NO). However, some rectifiers are shipped with the
port fixed to normally open. In this case, you must install a transistor to switch
the port setting to normally closed. Note that, if the port is set to normally
open, an alarm is raised when the port is connected to ground.
CAUTION
—continued—


Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier
Requirements
Table 7-3 lists the tools and materials required for connecting external power
alarms to a rectifier.
Table 7-3
Tools and materials for connecting external power alarms to a rectifier
Wire strippers 1 no
24 AWG insulated copper wire as required no

(ETSI equivalent: 0.2 mm2)
Flat head screwdriver (slotted) 3/32 in. 1 no

Note: You may also require a transistor. For details, see the ATTENTION on page
7-10.
Action
Step Action
1 Locate the external alarm terminal block on the back of the rectifier chassis.
2 Measure and cut lengths of 24 AWG insulated copper wire to reach from the
alarm terminal connectors on the rectifier to the maintenance panel on the
5200 shelf.
3 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the 24 AWG alarm wires.
4 Connect the alarm wires to the appropriate alarm connections on the rectifier
alarm terminal block. See Figure 7-5 on page 7-12. Loosen the screws (they
are not removable), and place the 24 AWG wire in the hole. Tighten the screw.
Note: For pinout information consult the manufacturer’s installation
documentation.
5 Route the alarm wires along the bottom of the rectifier chassis to the
equipment rack and secure the wires using lacing cord or tie wraps.
—continued—


Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier
Step Action
6 Follow the instruction in the ATTENTION on page 7-10, if applicable. Then

continue with this step.
If you want to Then
connect to
the 565/5100/5200 connect the other ends of the alarm wires to the
COTEL card telemetry inputs of the 565/5100/5200 COTEL card.
Follow Procedure 7-1 on page 7-4 to connect wires to
the COTEL card.
external equipment refer to manufacturer’s telemetry specifications
7 Route and secure the wires along the side of the equipment rack using tie
wraps or lacing cord to secure the wires.
—end—
Figure 7-5
Rectifier terminals for alarm connections
OM0101p
0V
J4 J4
Alm Out Alm Rtn
–48V
PS2 PS1 0V
J4 J4
Alm Out Alm Rtn
-48V
PS2 PS1

Procedure 7-3
Connecting an external power alarm to a 2U AC
rectifier
Follow this procedure to connect an external power alarm from a 2U AC
rectifier to the central office telemetry (COTEL) card.
Five alarms for the 2U AC rectifier are possible. However, only four telemetry
inputs are available on the COTEL card: pins 29, 30, 31, and 32 (see Table 7-5
on page 7-17). Assign alarms for the 2U AC rectifier depending on system
configuration and requirements. Assign at least one rectifier alarm (Common).
This procedure presents instructions on connecting one external power
(Common) alarm.
Note: This procedure presents instructions on assigning a Common

alarm. All alarms trigger alarm relay 1 only. However, details are provided
for connecting a total of four alarms.
CAUTION
Requirements
Make sure that you
• bear in mind that five alarms are available for the 2U AC rectifier:
Common, Mains, Rectifier Critical Rectifier, Battery Fuse Load Fuse, and
Battery Fault. However, only four telemetry inputs are available on the
COTEL card: pins 29, 30, 31, and 32.
Note: You use COTEL card pin 16 for telemetry input return (see Table
7-5 on page 7-17) to ground every 2U AC rectifier alarm.
• determine the number of alarms to assign for the 2U AC rectifier based on

system configuration and requirements. For example, one or more of the
telemetry inputs (pins 29, 30, 31, and 32) can be required for other
peripheral equipment alarms, which reduces the number of telemetry
inputs available for the 2U AC rectifier alarms.
• assign at least one rectifier alarm (Common). This procedure presents
instructions on assigning one alarm (Common). If you require additional
alarms, see the manufacturer’s documentation. See also Table 7-4 on
page 7-15, Table 7-5 on page 7-17, and Table 7-6 on page 7-18.
—continued—


Connecting an external power alarm to a 2U AC rectifier
Tools and materials

• wire strippers
• 22 AWG insulated copper wire (supplied with the 2U AC rectifier)
• flat head screwdriver (slotted) 3/32 in.
• cable ties or lacing cord
Action
Step Action
1 Locate the external alarm terminal block on the rear of the 2U AC rectifier
chassis (see Figure 7-6 on page 7-16).
2 Measure and cut lengths of 22 AWG insulated copper wire to reach from the
alarm terminal connectors on the rear of the 2U AC rectifier to the COTEL
card.
3 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of two 22 AWG alarm wires.
4 Insert a small blade screwdriver (Figure 7-7 on page 7-16) into the hole above
alarm output pin 16 of connector 5 (alarm relay 1 normally closed, NC) to
release the tension clamp.
Note: Table 7-6 on page 7-18 lists the pinout descriptions for the alarm relay
outputs for connector 5.
5 Hardwire by placing a stripped 22 AWG wire into alarm output pin 16 of
connector 5 (alarm relay 1 normally closed, NC).
6 Release and remove the small blade screwdriver from the hole.
The tension clamp closes and holds the 22 AWG wire firmly in the connector.
7 Make sure that the 22 AWG wire is secured firmly in the connector.
8 Repeat step 4 to step 7 for alarm output pin 18 of connector 5 (alarm relay 1
common, C).
9 Route the alarm wires along the top of the rectifier chassis to the COTEL card
in the maintenance panel.
Note 1: For additional details on connecting to the COTEL card, see
Procedure 7-1.
Note 2: If you want to connect to external equipment, see the refer to
manufacturer’s telemetry specifications.
—continued—


Step Action
10 Hardwire the alarm wires to the alarm input connectors on the COTEL card
as indicated in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4
Alarm connections between a 2U AC rectifier and a COTEL card
From alarm connector 5 of 2U AC rectifier To COTEL card
Pin 16 Pin 16 Telemetry Return

Alarm relay 1 Normally Closed (NC)
Pin 18 Pin 29 Telemetry Input 1

Alarm relay 1 Common (C)
Note 1: If you want to connect additional alarms, follow the same connection
pattern as for the Common alarm listed in this table. For example, the connections
for the next alarms are as follows: Pin 15 and 13 from alarm connector 5 to Pin 16
and 30 of the COTEL card; Pin 12 and 10 from alarm connector 5 to Pin 16 and 31;
and Pin 9 and 7 from alarm connector 5 to Pin 16 and 32.
Note 2: Pin 16 of the COTEL card is the telemetry return. You must ground every
alarm to this pin.
11 Secure the alarm wires along the frame with cable ties or lacing cord.
12 Perform Procedure 7-4 to assign a name to the 2U AC rectifier alarm.
—end—

Figure 7-6
2U AC rectifier (rear)— rectifier terminals for alarm connections
OM3889.jpg
Figure 7-7
Inserting 22 AWG wires into pin 16 and pin 18 of 2U AC rectifier connector 5
OM3889.jpg

Table 7-5
Connector pin signal assignments for COTEL card on 5200 shelf
P Signal Connector P Signal
1 CO Visual Critical (common) 17 CO Audible Minor (common)
2 CO Visual Critical (norm. open) 18 CO Audible Minor (norm. open)

3 CO Visual Critical (normally closed) 19 CO Audible Minor (norm. closed)
4 CO Visual Major (common) 1 17 20 Telemetry Output 1 (common)
5 CO Visual Major (norm. open) 21 Telemetry Output 1 (norm. open)
6 CO Visual Major (norm. closed) 22 Telemetry Output 1 (norm.

closed)
7 CO Visual Minor (common) 23 Telemetry Output 2 (common)
8 CO Visual Minor (norm. open) 24 Telemetry Output 2 (norm. open)
9 CO Visual Minor (norm. closed) 25 Telemetry Output 3 (common)

10 CO Audible Critical (common) 26 Telemetry Output 3 (norm. open)
11 CO Audible Critical (norm. open) 27 Telemetry Output 4 (common)
12 CO Audible Critical (norm. closed) 16 32 28 Telemetry Output 4 (norm. open)
13 CO Audible Major (common) 29 Telemetry Input 1
14 CO Audible Major (norm. open) 30 Telemetry Input 2
15 CO Audible Major (norm. closed) 31 Telemetry Input 3
16 Telemetry Input Return 32 Telemetry Input 4
Note: You can use telemetry input 1 to 4 (pins 29, 30, 31, and 32) to assign one or more alarms for the
2U AC rectifier depending on system configuration and requirements. Use telemetry input return (pin
16) as the alarm ground for every alarm you assign for the 2U AC rectifier.

Table 7-6
Partial pinout descriptions for 2U AC rectifier connector 5
—alarm relay outputs only
Pin Description
7 Alarm relay 4 Normally Closed (NC) contact
8 Alarm relay 4 Normally Open (NO) contact

9 Alarm relay 4 Common (C) contact


Procedure 7-4
Assigning and monitoring alarms on a 2U AC rectifier
Follow this procedure to assign and monitor alarms on a 2U AC rectifier.
CAUTION
Requirements
You must connect an external power alarm to the 2U AC rectifier. Perform
Procedure 7-3, “Connecting an external power alarm to a 2U AC rectifier”.
Make sure that you have a

• PC equipped with Eltek Winpower software
• a DB9M to DB9M cable
Action
Step Action
1 Use an RS-232 DB9M to DB9M cable to provide an RS-232 connection from

the monitoring and control unit (MCU) to the female DB-9 connector on the
PC.
2 Set the communications parameters on the PC to the following values:
Baud Rate = 19200
Bits/Parity = 8
Parity = No
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = No
3 Launch the Eltek Winpower software.
4 From the Alarm Setup/Display tab in the General Configuration window,
select a relay output to the alarms to be monitored by the 5200 system.
—continued—


Assigning and monitoring alarms on a 2U AC rectifier
Step Action
5 Assign a name for at least one rectifier alarm (Common) from the 2U AC
rectifier to the central office and telemetry (COTEL) card of the 5200 network
element.
Note 1: Table 7-7 lists the Common alarm and the corresponding
connections between the 2U AC rectifier connector 5 and the COTEL card.
Note 2: If you want to connect additional alarms t for Relay 2, 3, and 4, follow
the same connection pattern as for the Common alarm listed in Table 7-7. For
example, the connections for the next alarms are as follows: Pin 15 and 13
from alarm connector 5 to Pin 16 and 30 of the COTEL card; Pin 12 and 10
from alarm connector 5 to Pin 16 and 31; and Pin 9 and 7 from alarm
connector 5 to Pin 16 and 32. See also the manufacturer’s documentation
and Table 7-5 on page 7-17 and Table 7-6 on page 7-18.
—end—
Table 7-7
MCU alarms and corresponding connections
MCU alarm type Output Connector 5 COTEL card Name assigned

relay pin pins in software
outputs
Common Relay 1 18 and 16 16 and 29 Rectifier

Summary Alarm
Note: Pin 16 of the COTEL card is the telemetry return. You must ground every
alarm to this pin.

Procedure 7-5
Connecting an external power alarm to a 1U AC
rectifier
Use this procedure to connect an external power alarm from a 1U AC rectifier
to the telemetry inputs of the access panel of the 5200 shelf or external
equipment.
CAUTION
Requirements
• wire strippers
• #22 AWG insulated copper wire (stranded wire, supplied with the rectifier)
• flathead screwdriver 3/32 in.
Note: The alarm cable included with the rectifier kit is stranded wire. If the
alarm cable must be wire-wrapped, you must order separate solid
conductor alarm cabling.
Action
Step Action
1 Locate the external alarm terminal block on the back of the rectifier chassis.
See Figure 7-8 on page 7-22.
2 Measure and cut lengths of #22 AWG insulated copper wire to reach from the
alarm terminal connectors on the rectifier to the access panel.
3 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the #22 AWG alarm wires.
4 Connect the alarm wires to the “C” (Common) and “NC” Normally Closed
alarm connections on the rectifier alarm terminal block. Loosen the screws
(they are not removable), and place the #22 AWG wire in the hole. Tighten
the screw.
Note: For pinout information consult the manufacturers installation
documentation.
5 Route the alarm wires along the bottom of the rectifier chassis to the
equipment rack and secure the wires using lacing cord or tie wraps.
—continued—


Step Action
6 Select your next step:

If you want to Then
connect to
the telemetry inputs you will connect the other ends of the alarm wires to
on the access the telemetry inputs on the access panel in the
panel procedure on connecting control and communications
cables.
external equipment refer to manufacturer’s telemetry specifications
7 Route and secure the wires along the side of the equipment rack using tie
wraps or lacing cord to secure the wires.
—end—
Figure 7-8
1U AC rectifier terminals for alarm connections
OM3725
C NC NO

Procedure 7-6
Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch
Follow this procedure to make alarm connections from each Optical Trunk
Switch to the 5200 COTEL (central office and telemetry) card.
To make the alarm connections, follow the connector pin-out diagram on the
back of the module. Figure 7-9 shows how the alarm connections should be
connected to the COTEL card.
For more information on the Optical Trunk Switch, see “Optical Trunk Switch”
in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
CAUTION
Figure 7-9
Alarm connections
OM0303p
—continued—


Requirements
Table 7-8 lists the tools and materials you require to make the alarm
connections for the Optical Trunk Switch.
Table 7-8
Tools and materials for making alarm connections
Miniature slot screwdriver 1 No
24 AWG insulated wire As required No
16-pin connector 2 Yes
Wire strippers 1 No
Action
Step Action
1 If the cover of the 5200 maintenance panel is not open, loosen the
thumbscrews and remove the left maintenance panel cover to access the
interface cards in the maintenance panel.
2 Locate the COTEL interface card and identify the pins on the connector to
which you want to connect. For pinout information, see Technical
Specifications, 323-1701-180. Figure 7-10 on page 7-25 shows an example
of a COTEL card with telemetry connections.
a. Connect the Major Switch pin on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to
pin 29 of the COTEL card
b. Connect the Primary Fail pin on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to
pin 30 of the COTEL card.
c. Connect the STNBY/Power A or B Fail pin on the back of the Optical
Trunk Switch to pin 31 of the COTEL card.
d. Connect one connection of each relay on the back of the Optical Trunk
Switch to pin 16 of the COTEL card.
3 Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the first 24 AWG wire that you want to
insert in the connector.
4 Pry the spring clamp open. See Figure 7-11 on page 7-26.
connector that corresponds to the signal you want to connect. See Figure
7-11 on page 7-26.
—continued—


Step Action
connector to secure the wire. See Figure 7-11 on page 7-26.
7 When facing the frame, route and secure the wires from the Optical Trunk
Switch to the COTEL card along the left-hand side of the frame using
tie-wraps or lacing cord.
8 Replace the left maintenance panel cover.
—end—
Figure 7-10
OM0097

Figure 7-11
OM0096t

Procedure 7-7
Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch
Follow this procedure to make alarm connections from each Enhanced Trunk
Switch to the 16-pin socket connectors of the 5200 central office and telemetry
(COTEL) card. This procedure is required to monitor the status of the
Enhanced Trunk Switch alarms using the System Manager Interface.
CAUTION
To make the alarm connections, follow the connector pin-out of the ETS alarm
telemetry block on the back of the ETS shelf. Table 7-9 on page 7-28 lists the
pin assignment for the ETS alarm telemetry block and customized DB-25
cable (see Figure 7-12).
Figure 7-12
Customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA)
OM2594t
—continued—


Table 7-9
Pin assignment for the ETS alarm telemetry block and customized DB-25 cable
ETS Signal description Color code of Internal

alarm open-ended connection of
telemetry connector on customized
block pin customized DB-25 DB-25 cable
number (NT0H43RA)
2 Critical alarm brown -
3 Slot A (left) major alarm red -
4 Slot A (left) minor alarm orange -
5 Power A fail alarm yellow -
6 Power B fail alarm green -
7 Fan 1 alarm blue -
8 Fan 2 alarm violet -
12 Slot B major alarm white/brown -
13 Slot B minor alarm white/red -
15 Critical alarm return white/yellow to pin 16
16 Slot A major alarm return white/green to pin 17
17 Slot A minor alarm return white/blue to pin 18
18 Power A fail alarm return white/violet to pin 19
19 Power B fail alarm return white/silver to pin 20
20 Fan 1 alarm return white/black/brown to pin 21
21 Fan 2 alarm return white/black/red to pin 24
24 Slot B major alarm return white/brown/green to pin 25
25 Slot B minor alarm return white/brown/blue (connected with

all other ground
pins)
Note: The ETS Comms module is in slot A (left side of the ETS shelf) and the ETS
Switch module is in slot B (right side of the ETS shelf).
—continued—


Since the Fan alarms, Power fail alarms and the ETS Switch alarms are
reported through the ETS Comms (Slot A alarms) as alarms, Ciena
recommends that you connect only three of the alarms listed in Table 7-9 on
page 7-28 as follows:
• Critical alarm
• Slot A major alarm
• Slot A minor alarm
Note: The 5200 shelf maintenance panel includes four telemetry input
ports.
This procedure requires the DB-25 customized cable (NT0H43RA), which can
be ordered separately and which is also part of the ETS installation kit
(NTUG90GH). The customized DB-25 cable is used to facilitate the
connection from the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block to the 5200 maintenance
panel (COTEL card).
For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to Hardware

Requirements
Table 7-10 lists the tools and materials required to make the alarm
connections for the Enhanced Trunk Switch.
Table 7-10
Tools and materials for making alarm connections
Miniature slot screwdriver 1 No
Customized DV-25 cable 1 Yes (part of the ETS

(NT0H43RA) installation kit
[NTUG90GH] or
separately orderable)
Wire strippers 1 No
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Locate the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block that is labeled sense alarm at the
rear of the ETS shelf (DB-25 female connector).
2 Locate the 5200 maintenance panel where the telemetry connections are
going to be made.
3 Take the customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA). Connect the male 25-pin
connector of the customized cable to the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block
located in step 1. Use the miniature slot screw driver to tighten the connector
on the port (on the left and right side).
4 If the cover of the 5200 maintenance panel is not open, loosen the
thumbscrews and remove the left maintenance panel cover to access the
interface cards in the maintenance panel.
5 Locate and carefully remove the two 16-pin connectors and locate the pins
on the connectors to which you want to connect. For pinout information, see
Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.
6 On the customized DB-25 cable, strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the
four open-ended wires that you want to insert into the 16-pin connector. As
shown in Table 7-9 on page 7-28 you will use the following open-ended wires:
brown, red, orange and one of the return wires (many choices available
because they are all interconnected in the DB-25 customized cable).
7 Make the following connections.
a. Critical alarm: connect the brown open wire of the customized DB-25
cable to pin 31 of the 16-pin connector (telemetry input 3).
b. Major alarm: connect the red open wire of the customized DB-25 cable to
pin 30 of the 16-pin connector (telemetry input 2).
c. Minor alarm: connect the orange open wire of the customized DB-25
cable to pin 29 of the 16-pin connector (telemetry input 1).
d. Return: connect one of the return wires of the customized DB-25 cable to
pin 16 of the 16-pin connector (common return). Several choices of return
wires are available on the customized DB-25 cable. For more
information, refer to Table 7-9 on page 7-28.
8 On the 16-pin connector, pry open the spring clamp (see Figure 7-14 on page
7-32).
connector that corresponds to the signal you want to connect (see Figure
7-14 on page 7-32).
—continued—


Step Action
connector to secure the wire (see Figure 7-14 on page 7-32).
11 When the four wires are connected, carefully replace the two 16-pin
connectors in the maintenance panel.
12 Face the frame and route and secure the cable from the ETS to the 16-pin
connectors along the left-hand side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing
cord.
13 Replace the shelf maintenance panel cover.
14 Use Procedure 1-9, “Configuring telemetry ports and alarms” in Provisioning
and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310, to provision telemetry input ports
1 to 3.
—end—
Figure 7-13
OM0097s
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TELEMETRY
1 17
16 32

Figure 7-14
OM0096t

Procedure 7-8
Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet
cable
Follow this procedure to set up messaging between 5200 shelves.
For details on data communications, see “Data communications in the

565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link Engineering,
323-1701-110.

CAUTION
Requirements
You must determine the length and type of cross-over Ethernet cable in order
to complete this procedure. See Table 7-11 for cable types. For pinout
information for cross-over cables, see Cable pinouts and specifications on
page 7-34.
Table 7-11
Ethernet cable types
Type of wiring Length Use
Cross-over (shielded) 2.15 m (7 ft) Used to connect two

components in the same rack.
4.5 m (15 ft) Used to connect two
components in different racks.
—continued—


Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable
Cable pinouts and specifications

See Table 7-12 for signal connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each
end of a cross-over cable.
Table 7-12
RJ45 (cross-over) cable specifications
RJ45 plug Pin (End 1) Signal Pin (End 2)
1 RXD+ 3
2 RXD– 6
3 TXD+ 1
4 no connection no connection
8 1
6 TXD– 2
Expected results
• you can view system management information by connecting the System
Manager computer to one 5200 shelf in the network
• the connection is made between two powered 5200 shelves and the Link
indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on
Action
Step Action
Note: Regardless of which type of Shelf Processor is equipped in the shelf

(Shelf Processor [SP] S0H60NAD1A or Enhanced Shelf Processor [eSP]
NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout Procedure 7-8
(10Base-T 2X). Bear in mind, however, that if the shelf is equipped with an
eSP, the System Manager user interface shows 100BaseT (not 10BaseT) for
the port.
—continued—


Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable
Step Action
1 You must enable the 10Base-T 2X port as well as the 10Base-T 2X port alarm
on both shelves, which will be connected together with a cross-over Ethernet
cable. By default, the 10Base-T 2X port is enabled and the 10Base-T 2X port
alarm is disabled. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port, refer to Procedure 1-27,
“Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and Operating
Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to
Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and
Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.
2 Plug one end of a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the 10Base-T 2X
port of one 5200 shelf, as shown in Figure 7-15.
3 Plug the other end of the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the
10Base-T 2X port of the second 5200 shelf. See Figure 7-16 on page 7-36.
When the connection is made between two powered 5200 shelves, the Link
indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on.
4 Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cable from the 10Base-T 2X port
along the side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
CAUTION
Do not route Ethernet cables through the vertical fiber
brackets of the 5200 shelves. Doing so can cause
—end—
Figure 7-15
Setting up intershelf messaging—maintenance panel connectors
OM0147p

NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout Procedure 7-8

the port.
Figure 7-16
Ethernet cable requirements in a two-shelf site
OM3775
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO
LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 2.1m (7 ft)
crossover
FAN
STATUS
Ethernet cable
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
2
FAN
STATUS
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS

Procedure 7-9
Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub
(hubbed topology)
Follow this procedure to set up intershelf messaging in a site that is equipped
with an Ethernet hub (see Figure 7-17 on page 7-41).
When you complete this procedure, intershelf messaging is set up and you
can view system management information by connecting the System
Manager computer to one 5200 shelf in the network.

323-1701-110.

CAUTION
Requirements
Before you begin this procedure, you must have completed “Installing an
Ethernet hub” in the “Installing 5200 shelves and equipment” chapter of this
book.
You must determine the quantity and type of Ethernet cables to complete this
procedure. See Table 7-13 on page 7-38 for cable types. See Table 7-14 on
page 7-38 for your Ethernet equipment requirements. For pinout information
for cross-over cables, see “Cable pinouts and specifications” on page 7-39.
Refer to Figure 7-18 on page 7-42 for information about the correct lengths of
Ethernet cables.
—continued—


Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology)
Table 7-13
Straight-through 2.75 m (9 ft) Used to connect an 565/5100/5200

shelf to the System Manager
computer.
Cross-over (shielded) 2.15 m (7 ft) Used to connect two components
in the same rack.
4.5 m (15 ft) Used to connect two components

in different racks.
Table 7-14
Ethernet cable requirements
Number of Ethernet cables required Number of

shelves at Ethernet hub shelves at
the site required? the site
Cross-over (shielded) Straight-through

(from each shelf to the hub) (to the DCN device)
2.15 m (7 ft) 4.5 m (15 ft) 2.75 m (9 ft)
2 no 1 N/A 1 2
3 yes 2 or 3 1 or 0 1 3
4 yes 3 1 1 4
5 yes 3 2 1 5
6 yes 3 3 1 6
7 yes 3 4 1 7
8 yes 3 5 1 8
Note 1: If the shelf is equipped with a Shelf Processor, you must follow the requirements listed in
Table 7-14.
Note 2: If the shelf is equipped with an Enhanced Shelf Processor, (eSP) you can use either a
cross-over cable or a straight-through cable to connect to the Ethernet hub or the data
communications network (DCN) device.
—continued—


Cable pinouts and specifications

The maximum cable length is 100 m (300 ft). See Table 7-15 for signal
connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a shielded Ethernet
straight-through cable.
Table 7-15
RJ45 (shielded Ethernet straight-through) cable specifications
1 RXD+ 1
2 RXD– 2
3 TXD+ 3
4 no connection 4
5 no connection 5
8 1
6 TXD– 6
7 no connection 7
8 no connection 8
end of a cross-over cable. Use a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable to
connect the 10Base-T 2X port on the maintenance panel to the Ethernet hub.
Table 7-16
RJ45 (Ethernet cross-over) cable specifications
1 RXD+ 3
2 RXD– 6
3 TXD+ 1
8 1
6 TXD– 2
—continued—


Action
Step Action

NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout this procedure
the port.
1 Make sure that you follow the Ethernet cable requirements (Table 7-14 on
page 7-38, in particular Note 1 and Note 2) based on whether the shelf is
equipped with a Shelf Processor or an Enhanced Shelf Processor.
2 You must enable the 10Base-T 2X port as well as the 10Base-T 2X port
alarm.
By default, the 10Base-T 2X port is enabled and the 10Base-T 2X port alarm
is disabled. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port, refer to Procedure 1-27,
“Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and Operating
Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to
Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and
Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.
3 Plug one end of a Ethernet cable into an Ethernet port of the Ethernet hub.
4 Route the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet hub to the destination 5200 shelf
according to the layout in Figure 7-18 on page 7-42.
CAUTION
brackets of the 5200 shelves. Doing so can damage the
optical fibers in the brackets.
5 Route and secure the Ethernet cable from the 10Base-T 2X port along the
side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
6 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the
5200 shelf.
7 Repeat step 1 to step 6 for all the 5200 shelves in the site that must be
connected to an Ethernet hub.
When you make the connection between a powered 5200 shelf and a
powered Ethernet hub, the Link indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 2X port
of the shelf comes on and stays on.
8 Follow the procedure to set up the Intra Site Connection Misconfiguration
alarm in Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, 323-1701-542.
—end—

Figure 7-17
Intrasite communications using an Ethernet hub
OM3811
DCN Ethernet hub
Enet1 Enet2 Enet1 Enet2 Enet1 Enet2

565/5100/ 565/5100/ 565/5100/
5200 5200 5200
Gateway NE

Figure 7-18
Ethernet cable requirements in a multishelf site
OM3776
4.5m
(15 ft)
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
4.5m
(15 ft)
3
4.5m
(15 ft)
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
LINK
RX
PWR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2.1m
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE) RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
1
14
1
CRITICAL
14
6
6
POWER A POWER B CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MAJOR
9
5
5
MINOR
MINOR
ON ON ON ON
DATA
25
25
DATA
13
13
ESD ESD
(7 ft)
10BASE-T 1X 10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
DATA
ACO POWER A POWER B 10BASE-T 2X
LINK ACO
LINK
2.1m
1 4 (7 ft)
WEST OMX EAST OMX WEST OMX EAST OMX

BAND LOS BAND LOS BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE) RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
1
6
14
CRITICAL CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B POWER A POWER B

MAJOR
9
MAJOR
5
MINOR MINOR
ON ON ON ON
DATA
25
DATA
25
13
13
ESD ESD
10BASE-T 1X 10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO ACO
LINK OFF OFF LINK
DATA DATA
POWER A POWER B 10BASE-T 2X POWER A POWER B
ACO 10BASE-T 2X
ACO
LINK LINK
2 5
WEST OMX EAST OMX WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS BAND LOS BAND LOS

Procedure 7-10
Connecting two or more shelves through an
integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology)
Follow this procedure to set up intershelf messaging between two or more
shelves each equipped with an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP) (see Figure
7-19). You connect the shelves using cross-over Ethernet cables or
straight-through cables.
If you want to connect two or more shelves that are equipped with a Shelf
Processor (SP), follow Procedure 7-9.
When you complete this procedure, intershelf messaging is set up and you
can view system management information by connecting the System
Manager computer to one 5200 shelf in the network.

323-1701-110.

CAUTION
Requirements
Make sure that the shelves that you want to connect are all equipped with an
Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP) with Release 10.0 software. For ordering
information, see Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.
You can use shielded Ethernet cross-over cables or straight-through cables

to connect the shelves.
Note: The eSP has auto MDI/MDIX cross-over detection that eliminates
the requirement for special cross-over cabling.
You must determine the quantity and type of Ethernet cables to complete this
procedure. See Table 7-17 on page 7-44 for Ethernet cable lengths. For pinout
information for cross-over cables, see Table 7-19 on page 7-45.
—continued—


Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology)
Table 7-17
Straight-through 2.75 m (9 ft) Used to connect an 565/5100/5200

shelf to the System Manager
computer.
Cross-over (shielded) 2.15 m (7 ft) Used to connect two components
in the same rack.
4.5 m (15 ft) Used to connect two components

in different racks.
The maximum cable length is 100 m (300 ft). See Table 7-18 for signal
connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a shielded Ethernet
straight-through cable.
Table 7-18
RJ45 (shielded Ethernet straight-through) cable specifications
1 RXD+ 1
2 RXD– 2
3 TXD+ 3
4 no connection 4
5 no connection 5
8 1
6 TXD– 6
7 no connection 7
8 no connection 8
—continued—


end of a cross-over cable. Use a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable to
connect the 10Base-T 2X port on the maintenance panels.
Table 7-19
RJ45 (Ethernet cross-over) cable specifications
1 RXD+ 3
2 RXD– 6
3 TXD+ 1
8 1
6 TXD– 2
—continued—


Action
Step Action

NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout this procedure
(10Base-T 1X and 10Base-T 2X). Bear in mind, however, that if the shelf is
equipped with an eSP, the System Manager user interface shows 100BaseT
(not 10BaseT) for the port.
1 You must enable the 10Base-T 1X port, 10Base-T 2X port, 10Base-T 2X port
alarm, and 10Base-T 2X port alarm on the shelves that you plan to connect
with an Ethernet cable.
To enable the 10Base-T 1X port and 10Base-T 2X port, refer to
Procedure 1-27, “Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and
Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 1X port alarm
and the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning
Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures,
323-1701-310.
2 If the configuration Then
includes a single or dual gateway connect the 5200 shelf to the device on
network element (GNE) the data communications network
(DCN) by performing step 3
does not include a GNE go to step 8
3 Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the first 5200
shelf in the chain.
• for a single GNE, see Figure 7-19 and Figure 7-20
• for a dual GNE, see Figure 7-21 and Figure 7-22
4 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the device in the data
communications network (DCN).
When the connection is made between a powered 5200 shelf and a device
on the DCN, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 1X port comes on
and stays on.
—continued—


Step Action
5 If the configuration includes a Then

single GNE go to step 8
dual GNE perform step 6 and step 7 for the last
5200 in the chain. Then continue with
step 9.
6 Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the last 5200
shelf in the chain (third shelf in the figures).
7 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the device in the data
When the connection is made between a powered 5200 shelf and a device
on the DCN, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 1X port comes on
and stays on.
8 Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the first 5200
shelf in the chain (see Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24).
9 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the
second 5200 shelf in the chain.
indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on.
10 Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the second
5200 shelf in the chain.
—continued—


Step Action
11 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the third
5200 shelf in the chain.
• for no GNE, see Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24
indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 1X port and the 10Base-T 2X port comes
on and stays on.
12
CAUTION
Route and secure the Ethernet cables from the 10Base-T 1X ports and
10Base-T 2X ports along the side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
13 Follow the procedure to set up the Intra Site Connection Misconfiguration
alarm in Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, 323-1701-542.
—end—
Figure 7-19
5200 daisy chain topology, single GNE
OM3803
DCN
2X 2X 1X 2X
1X 1X
GNE 1 Non 2 Non 3

GNE GNE
565/5100/5200 565/5100/5200 565/5100/5200
Legend
1X = 10Base–T 1X = Enet 1

Figure 7-20
Daisy chain, single GNE, cable routing on shelves
OM3777
To DCN device
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
ACO LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
ACO
LINK
10Base-T 2X
3
10Base-T 1X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 10Base-T 2X
10Base-T 1X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
2 10Base-T 2X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS

Figure 7-21
5200 daisy chain topology, dual GNEs
OM3804
DCN
2X 2X 1X 2X
1X 1X
GNE 1 Non 2 GNE 3

GNE
565/5100/5200 565/5100/5200 565/5100/5200
Legend

Figure 7-22
Daisy chain, dual GNEs, cable routing on shelves
OM3778
To DCN device
10Base-T 1X
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
ACO LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
ACO
LINK
10Base-T 2X
3
10Base-T 1X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 10Base-T 2X
10Base-T 1X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
2 10Base-T 2X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS

Figure 7-23
5200 daisy chain topology, no GNE
OM3104t
2X 2X 1X 2X
1X 1X
GNE 1 Non 2 Non 3

GNE GNE
Legend

Figure 7-24
Daisy chain, no GNE, cable routing on shelves
OM3779
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
ACO LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
ACO
LINK
10Base-T 2X
3
10Base-T 2X WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
10Base-T 1X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
2 10Base-T 2X
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS

Procedure 7-11
Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5200 shelf using an
Ethernet cable
Follow this procedure to make an Ethernet connection between the Enhanced
Trunk Switch shelf and the 5200 shelf. The connection being made in this
procedure allows you to access remote ETS Switches and Comms modules.
The communication to the remote ETS Switch and Comms module is through
the 565/5100/5200 communications network. Perform this procedure to avoid
having to connect the remote ETS shelves directly into the data
This procedure involves connecting the ETS shelf directly to the 10Base-T 1X
port of the 5200 shelf. However, you can also use an Ethernet hub as a middle
access point for this Ethernet connection to the 5200 shelf. This procedure
does not include steps for such a connection.
For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to Hardware

CAUTION
Requirements
Table 7-20 lists the tools and materials you require to make the Ethernet
connection from the ETS shelf to the 5200 shelf.
Table 7-20
Tools and materials for the Ethernet connection between the ETS shelf and the
5200 shelf

Straight shielded CAT5 Ethernet 1 No
cable of the required length
—continued—


Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5200 shelf using an Ethernet cable
Action
Step Action
Note: This procedure involves connecting the ETS shelf directly to the
10BASE-T 1X port of the 5200 shelf. However, you can also use an Ethernet
hub as a middle access point for this Ethernet connection to the 5200 shelf.
For details on locating the required hub connections, contact your network
administrator. (This procedure does not include steps for such a connection.)
1 Locate the Ethernet port that is labeled Ethernet at the rear of the ETS shelf.
2 Locate the Ethernet port that is labeled 10BASE-T 1X on the maintenance
panel at the front right side of the 5200 shelf.
Note: The 10BASE-T 1X port is located on the right side of the 5200 shelf.
3 Select the straight Ethernet cable long enough to reach the ports identified in
step 1 and step 2.
4 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port at the rear of the
ETS shelf.
5 Route the Ethernet cable to the front of the rack, preferably using an external
routing management device provided by the customer. If no routing
management device is available, bring the Ethernet cable to the front of the
rack and use the vertical fiber management brackets of the 5200 shelf to hold
the Ethernet cable.
6 Route the Ethernet cable to the top or bottom of the rack using the 5200 shelf
vertical fiber management brackets or any other routing management device
provided by the customer.
Routing the Ethernet cable to the top or bottom of the rack depends on the
location of the 5200 shelf where the Ethernet cable will be connected (the
port identified in step 2).
7 Route the Ethernet cable from the left to the right side of the shelf using the
fiber management trough at the bottom of the 5200 shelf, or using an external
fiber management device provided by the customer (used with 5200 or 5100
shelves).
8 On the right side of the 5200 shelf, use the shelf vertical fiber management
brackets or any other routing management device provided by the customer
to reach the Ethernet port 10BASE-T 1X identified in step 2.
—continued—


Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5200 shelf using an Ethernet cable
Step Action
9 Connect the end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port 10BASE-T 1X
identified in step 2.
10 Repeat this procedure for all the ETS shelves in the network, connecting
each of them to an 565/5100/5200 shelf that is collocated with the ETS.
—end—

Procedure 7-12
Connecting to a data communications network
Follow this procedure to connect the 5200 network to a data communications
network (DCN). When you complete this procedure, you can run the System
Manager from a surveillance center or other remote management facility.
CAUTION
Requirements
You must have a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable (RJ45 to RJ45) to
connect 5200 shelves to a DCN. The cable is not supplied.
Action
Step Action
1 You must enable the 10Base-T 1X port alarm. To enable the 10Base-T 1X
port alarm, refer to refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port
alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.
2 Plug one end of a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into a port on an
Ethernet hub or router connected to a DCN.
3 Plug the other end of the shielded cable to the 10Base-T 1X port of a 5200
shelf or Ethernet hub in a 5200 site. Figure 7-25 shows the 10Base-T 1X port
on the maintenance panel.
When you connect a powered 5200 shelf to a powered Ethernet hub, the Link
indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 1X port of the shelf comes on and stays
on.
—continued—


Connecting to a data communications network
Step Action
4 Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cable from the 10Base-T 1X port
along the right-side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.
CAUTION
—end—
Figure 7-25
Connecting to a data communications network—maintenance panel connectors
OM0147p
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
CRITICAL
6
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
Ethernet Ports

Procedure 7-13
Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel
The 5200 shelves support data communication between a shelf and the
passive optical devices that are associated with the shelf. Inside the
maintenance panel of each shelf are two OMX interface (OMXI) cards that
allow the System Manager to inventory and monitor the equipment. Each
passive optical device contains an identity card that carries information about
that component.
The passive devices listed in Table 7-21 may be connected to the EIU. The
passive device connects to the shelf using a data communication cable.
Table 7-21
Passive devices and data communications cable information
Passive device Includes data communications cable
OMX Yes
OMX 16CH DWDM Yes
ECT Yes
C&L splitter/coupler No
OSC splitter/coupler Yes
OSC splitter/coupler with dual optical No

taps
Transponder Protection Tray (TPT) No
Transponder Protection Tray 10 filter, Yes

TPT-10 (NT0H59AC)
VOA tray No
1310 nm splitter/coupler No
PBE No
DSCM No
—continued—


The Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) can also be connected to an OMXI port
on the maintenance panel. The Equipment Inventory Unit allows you to
increase the number of optical passive devices that can be associated with a
single 5200 shelf (from 4 to 19).
Refer to Procedure 7-16, Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the
maintenance panel to connect the EIU to the maintenance panel and
Procedure 7-14, Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit
in new installations to connect passive devices to the EIU.
Table 7-22 lists the specifications for each cable.
Table 7-22
Data communication cables
PEC Length Use
NT0H4345 Simplex RJ45-RJ45 Connect passive devices or Equipment Inventory Unit to the
1.5 m (60 in.) maintenance panel and connect passive devices to the
Equipment Inventory Unit.
NT0H4322 Simplex RJ45-RJ45 Connect passive devices or Equipment Inventory Unit to the
2.98 m (117 in.) maintenance panel and connect passive devices to the
Equipment Inventory Unit.
Follow this procedure to connect the data communications cable to the

maintenance panel and route the data communications cable to the tray.

• the data communications cable is connected to the optical multiplexer
interface (OMXI) cards in the maintenance panel
• the ferrite bead is attached to the data communications cable
• the data communications cable is routed and connected in the equipment
drawer
For more information on specific equipment drawers, see Hardware
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
Before you begin this procedure, you must have completed the procedures to
mount a 5200 shelf in a rack or cabinet. Refer to the “Installing 5200 shelves
and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures.
Table 7-23 lists the tools and materials required for connecting and routing the
data communications cable.
Table 7-23
Tools and materials for connecting and routing the data communications cable

Data communications cable (see Table 7-22 1 yes
for correct cable type) (see Note)
Ferrite bead 1 yes
Cable tie (tie wrap) (P0567226) 1 for the no

OMX 16CH
DWDM
Note: The data communications cable may have to be ordered separately. For
ordering details, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in
Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.
Prepare the following two labels for the data communications cables:
• West 1
• East 1
Note: If you are connecting the cables to the bottom OMXI ports, prepare
two labels that read West 2, and East 2.
—continued—


Precautions
Be sure to install the ferrite bead around the cable in the maintenance panel,
to comply with Class B emissions requirements (see step 5).
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation
The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A
(IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only
viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.
Action
Step Action
1 If the maintenance panel is not open, loosen the thumbscrews and remove
the left maintenance panel cover to access the interface cards.
2 Insert the end of the data communications cable with the short leads through
the access slot in the left side of the maintenance panel. For a list of cable
types, see Table 7-22 on page 7-60.
3 Insert the WEST 1 connector in the OMXI port 1 (top) or 2 (bottom) on the left
OMXI card in the maintenance panel, as shown in Figure 7-26 on page 7-65.
4 Insert the EAST 1 connector in the OMXI port 1 (top) or 2 (bottom) on the right
OMXI card in the maintenance panel, as shown in Figure 7-26 on page 7-65.
5 Clamp the ferrite around the data communications cable.
ferrite as required. The ferrites can be mounted one on top of each other,
laced together.
7 Run the cables down the left side of the shelf through the vertical fiber
brackets.
8 If you are connecting Then go to
an OMX (Standard) step 9
an ECT step 23
an OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH step 25
DWDM 100 GHz
any other piece of equipment step 14
—continued—


Step Action
9 Run the shorter lead (west monitor) straight down the left vertical fiber bracket
10 Run the longer lead (east monitor) through the fiber management trough to
the right side of the shelf and down the right vertical fiber bracket (see Figure
7-27 on page 7-66).
11 Identify the east and west cables of the OMX cable assembly coming from
the maintenance panel.
12 Take the west OMX cable and insert the jack into the port on the west OMX
tray installed in the left side of the drawer.
13 Take the east OMX cable and insert the jack into the port on the east OMX
installed in the right side of the drawer.
Go to step 28.
If the passive device is equipped with a Then go to
drawer that you pull open using latches step 15
hinged door step 18
15 Open the west equipment drawer by pressing and holding the two locking
latches on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open.
16 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located at the front of the drawer, and
route the cable, using the two tie-downs, as applicable.
For internal cable routing on equipment drawers that you pull toward you to
open, see:
• Figure 7-29 for OMX 1CH CWDM
• Figure 7-30 for OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH CWDM, OMX
4CH CWDM with dual taps, OMX 4CH ITU CWDM, OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM
Note: For OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM (NTPM35ABA), go to step 18.
—continued—


Step Action
• Figure 7-33 for PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz

• Figure 7-34 for OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray - with optical tap,
C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm splitter/coupler, and OSC tray - with
dual taps
• Figure 7-35 for OSC tray - with dual taps, OSC tray - without optical tap,
OSC tray - with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm
splitter/coupler
• Figure 7-36 for Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter)
• Figure 7-37 for Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter)
Note: For Transponder Protection Tray (ten-filter) (NT0H59AC), go to
step 18.
• Figure 7-39 for Discrete VOA
17 Allow sufficient slack in the data communications cable to allow the drawer to
operate correctly. Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you slide the
drawer back into place.
Go to step 21.
18 Open the west equipment drawer by unlocking the captive screws on the
hinged door.
19 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located on the left side of the faceplate
(behind the door), and route the cable through the opening on the left side.
For cable routing on equipment drawers equipped with a hinged door that you
open, see:
• Figure 7-31 for OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH
ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA)
• Figure 7-38 for Transponder Protection Tray (ten filter) (NT0H59AC)
20 Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you close and lock the door.
21 Open the east equipment drawer.
22 Repeat step 14 and repeat, as applicable, to connect the cable from the east
OMXI port to the east equipment drawer.
Go to step 28.
23 Insert the end of the ECT cable labelled East into the monitor port located on
the left side of the east ECT. See Figure 7-40 on page 7-77.
24 Insert the end of the second ECT cable labelled West into the monitor port
located on the left side of the west ECT.
Go to step 28.
—continued—


Step Action
25 Unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left and right) of the front panel
to open the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Then, pull
down the front panel.
26 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located in the middle of the OMX
16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, just over the OTS fiber
connectors. Route the cable over the fiber connector slider adapters on the
right side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16 CH DWDM 100 GHz. The
cable must go out of the module through the round aperture on the side of the
OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Use a cable tie (tie wrap)
to attach the data communications cable to the right top fastening hole inside
the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16 CH DWDM 100 GHz.
For internal cable routing illustration, see Figure 7-32.
27 Close the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel by
pulling up the panel, and securing the two external lock-screws.
28 Replace the maintenance panel cover.
—end—
Figure 7-26
OMX cable jacks in the maintenance panel
OM0150t
TELEMETRY
OMXI
OMXI
1 1
1 17 ON
2 2
16 32 OFF
OMXI west 1 OMXI east 1

Figure 7-27
OMX (Standard) cable routing
OM3648
RS232/V24 1 (DTE)
Maintenance panel
RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
9
5
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
OFF OFF 10BASE-T 1X
LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
LINK
Fiber management trough
FAN
STATUS
WEST OMX
BAND LOS
EAST OMX
BAND LOS
East OMX monitor
West OMX monitor
Figure 7-28
External routing of cables from the maintenance panel to the OMXs
OM3649
RS232/V24 1 (DTE)
Maintenance panel
RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
1
14
6
9
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
OFF OFF 10BASE-T 1X
LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
LINK
Fiber management trough
FAN
STATUS
LOS West OMX

LOS
East OMX

Figure 7-29
Routing of cable for the OMX 1CH CWDM
OM0939p

Figure 7-30
Internal routing of OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager maintenance cable
B
O
BAND OTS THRU CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4
T DROP OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP
BAND TX
CH 1 DROP
CH 1 ADD
CH 2 DROP
CH 2 ADD
CH 3 DROP
CH 3 ADD
CH 4 DROP
CH 4 ADD
BAND RX
T
O
P ADD IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
T
O
P TX IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
B
O
T RX OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
Data communication cable
The internal cable routing for the following is the same as the cable routing (for
the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager) shown in Figure 7-30, with one exception:
• OMX 4CH Enhanced
• OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz
• OMX 4CH CWDM
• OMX 4CH ITU CWDM
• OMX 8CH ITU CWDM
The exception is related to the design of OMX 4CH ITU CWDM

(NTPM35AA/NTPM35AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA), all
introduced in Release 11.0. These types of OMXs are equipped with a hinged
door (not a pull-out drawer). The door protects a faceplate of ports. See Figure
7-31 on page 7-69 and Figure 7-38 on page 7-76.

Figure 7-31
Equipment Inventory Interface port on OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM NTPM35BA
OM3373.
OMX 4CH ITU CWDM - 1471-1531 nm (NTPM35AA)
OMX 4CH ITU CWDM - 1551-1611 nm (NTPM35AB)
OMX 8CH ITU CWDM - 1471-1611 nm (NTPM35BA)
Route cable through left opening of OMX and then

to Equipment Inventory Interface port. Connect cable.

Figure 7-32
Cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM
OM2660p
Note: Cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz is similar to the
cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM as shown in Figure 7-32.

Figure 7-33
Shelf ID cable routing for the PBE tray or PBE C-band 100 GHz tray
OM1928p
B B
O
C-band L-band L-band O
T OUT OUT THRU T
T T
O
C PBE L PBE C-band O
P IN IN THRU P
VOA VOA VOA VOA

T
BAND 5 BAND 6 BAND 7 BAND 8
T C-band L-band O
O
P IN IN P
B C PBE L PBE B
O O
T OUT OUT T
VOA VOA VOA VOA

BAND 1 BAND 2 BAND 3 BAND 4
Connect cable here
Note: Figure 7-33 shows the interior of a PBE tray. The interior of a PBE
C-band 100 GHz tray is similar to the interior of a PBE tray.

Figure 7-34
Interior view of the OSC tray - without optical tap
OM2275t
the OSC tray without optical tap) shown in Figure 7-34:
• C&L splitter/coupler tray
• OSC tray with optical tap
• OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual taps
• 1310 nm splitter/coupler tray

Figure 7-35
Interior view of the OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual taps
OM2670p
the OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual tap) shown in Figure 7-35:
• C&L splitter/coupler tray
• OSC tray with optical tap
• OSC tray without optical tap
• 1310 nm splitter/coupler tray

Figure 7-36
Interior view of the Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter)
OM2276t

Figure 7-37
Interior view of the Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter)
OM2277t

Figure 7-38
Equipment Inventory Interface port on Transponder Protection Tray, 10 filter (NT0H59AC)
OM3352.jpg

Figure 7-39
Interior view of the Discrete VOA tray
OM2287p
Figure 7-40
Interior view of the ECT tray
OM1363p

Procedure 7-14
Connecting passive devices to the Equipment
Inventory Unit in new installations
Follow this procedure to connect the passive optical devices to the Equipment
Inventory Unit (EIU) using the NT0H4322 cable (9.8 ft) or the NT0H4345 cable
(5 ft) and route the cable to the tray.
For existing installations, refer to Procedure 7-15, “Connecting passive

devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations” on page 7-87.
Refer to Procedure 7-16, “Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the

maintenance panel” to connect the EIU to the maintenance panel.
The EIU drawer allows up to 16 passive devices to be inventoried per shelf.

The EIU is connected to the shelf maintenance panel (5200 or 5100), then the
individual passive devices are connected to the EIU. The passive devices
listed in Table 7-24 can be connected to the EIU.
—continued—


Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations
Table 7-24
Passive devices and data communications cable information
Passive devices Includes data

communications cable
OMX Yes
OMX 16CH DWDM Yes
ECT Yes
C&L splitter/coupler No
OSC splitter/coupler Yes
OSC splitter/coupler with dual optical taps No
Transponder Protection Tray (TPT) No
Transponder Protection Tray 10 filter, TPT-10 Yes

(NT0H59AC)
VOA tray No
1310 nm splitter/coupler No
PBE No
DSCM No

• the EIU data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) is
connected between the EIU and the passive device
• the data communications cable is routed and connected in the equipment
drawer

CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
Before you begin this procedure, you must have completed the procedures to
mount a 5200 shelf (12U high) in a rack or cabinet. Also, you must have
completed the procedure for mounting an EIU and the passive devices. Refer
to the “Installing 5200 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the
required procedures.
Table 7-25 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure.
Table 7-25
Tools and materials for connecting and routing the data communications cable
for the EIU

Data communications cable (NT0H4322 or 1 yes
NT0H4345) (see Note 1)
Labels (see Note 2) as required no
Cable tie (tie wrap) (P0567226) 1 for the no
OMX 16CH
DWDM
Note 1: The data communications cable may have to be ordered separately. For
ordering details, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network
Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.
Note 2: When connecting equipment to the EIU, it is recommended that you label
the individual cables with the equipment type to which it is connected.
Note 3: For details on these cables, see “Cables and optical patch cords” in
Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Precautions
DANGER
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Insert the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) into the

appropriate port on the front of the EIU (see Figure 7-42 on page 7-86).
CAUTION
Risk of raising the “Unassigned OSID” alarm
Bear in mind the EIU port/direction restrictions when
you connect passive devices. Connect a west-facing
passive device to ports 1 to 8 of an EIU. Connect an
east-facing passive device to ports 9 to 16 of an EIU. If
you connect passive devices to the incorrect port, the
system raises the “Unassigned OSID” alarm.
Note: It is recommended that you label the cable with the equipment type to
which the cable will be connected.
2 Route the data communication cable from the right side of the EIU to the
passive device drawer as follows.
If the passive device data communications port is Then go to
located on the
right side of the shelf step 3
left side of the shelf step 4
Note: For a list of data communications cable types, see Table 7-22 on page
7-60.
3 Route the data communication cable from the right side of the EIU to the
passive device data communication port located on the right side of the shelf
as follows:
a. On the right side of the EIU, use the cable management bracket to
provide strain relief for the data communication cable connected to the
EIU.
b. Along the right side of the shelf, run the data communication cable
through the vertical fiber brackets.
Go to step 5.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Route the data communications cable from the right side of the EIU to the
passive device data communications port located on the left side of the shelf
as follows:
a. On the right side of the EIU, use the cable management bracket to
provide strain relief for the data communications cable connected to the
EIU.
b. Along the right side of the shelf, run the data communications cable
c. Run the data communications cable from the right side of the EIU to the
left side of the passive device drawer using one of the following methods:
— through the fiber management trough on any 5200 shelf (see Figure
7-41 on page 7-85)
— through the cable trough at the top of the bay
— through any other cable management hardware provided by the
customer
Note: If the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) is a bit
too long, use the vertical fiber brackets on the left or right side of the shelf to
store the slack (see Figure 7-41 on page 7-85).
5 If you are connecting Then go to

an OMX (Standard) - west tray step 6
an OMX (Standard) - east tray step 7
an ECT step 15
an OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX step 16
16CH DWDM 100 GHz
any other piece of equipment step 8
6 Insert the cable into the port on the west OMX tray installed in the left side of
the drawer (see Figure 7-27 on page 7-66).
You have completed this procedure.
7 Insert the cable into the port on the east OMX installed in the right side of the
drawer.
—continued—


Step Action

If the passive device is equipped with a Then go to
hinged door step 12
9 Open the equipment drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches
on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open.
10 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located at the front of the drawer, and
route the cable and secure using the cable ties provided.
For internal cable routing illustrations, see:
• Figure 7-29 for OMX 1CH CWDM
• Figure 7-30 for OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH CWDM, OMX
4CH CWDM with dual taps, OMX 4CH ITU CWDM, OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM
Note: For OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM (NTPM35ABA), go to step 12.
• Figure 7-33 for PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz
• Figure 7-34 for OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray - with optical tap,
C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm splitter/coupler, and OSC tray - with
dual taps
• Figure 7-35 for OSC tray - with dual taps, OSC tray - without optical tap,
OSC tray - with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm
splitter/coupler
• Figure 7-36 for Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter)
• Figure 7-37 for Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter)
Note: For Transponder Protection Tray (ten-filter) (NT0H59AC), go to
step 12.
• Figure 7-39 for Discrete VOA
11 Allow sufficient slack in the data communications cable to allow the drawer to
operate correctly. Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you slide the
drawer back into place.
12 Open the equipment drawer by unlocking the captive screws on the hinged
door.
—continued—


Step Action
13 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located on the left side of the faceplate
(behind the door), and route the cable through the opening on the left side.
For cable routing on equipment drawers equipped with a hinged door that you
open, see:
• Figure 7-31 for OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH
ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA)
• Figure 7-38 for Transponder Protection Tray (ten filter) (NT0H59AC)
14 Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you close and lock the door.
15 Insert the cable into the monitor port located on the left side of the ECT. See
Figure 7-40 on page 7-77.
16 Unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left and right) of the front panel
of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz drawer. Then pull
down the front panel.
17 Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located in the middle of the OMX
16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, just over the OTS fiber
connectors. Route the cable over the fiber connector slider adapters on the
right side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. The
cable must exit the module through the round aperture on the side of the OMX
16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Use a cable tie (tie wrap) to
attach the data communications cable to the right top fastening hole inside
the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz.
For internal cable routing, see Figure 7-32.
18 Pull up the panel and secure the two external lock-screws to close the OMX
16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel.
—end—

Figure 7-41
Routing the data communications cable right from the EIU and left into the passive device drawer
OM3650
Cable
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE) management
bracket
1
14
6
9
5
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
OFF OFF 10BASE-T 1X
LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
LINK
EIU
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
1
14
6
9
5
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
OFF OFF 10BASE-T 1X
LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
LINK
Vertical
brackets
Fiber
management
trough
WEST OMX EAST OMX
BAND LOS BAND LOS
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)

1
1
14
6
9
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
OFF OFF 10BASE-T 1X
LINK
DATA
10BASE-T 2X
LINK
FAN
STATUS
FAN
STATUS
Vertical
brackets
LOS
LOS

Figure 7-42
OM3651.jpg

Procedure 7-15
Connecting passive devices to the Equipment
Inventory Unit in existing installations
Use this procedure to reconfigure existing connections between passive
devices and the maintenance panel to connections from the passive devices
to an Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) connected to the maintenance panel.
For new installations, see Procedure 7-14 “Connecting passive devices to the
Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations”.
CAUTION
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, you must
• know which shelf in the rack the EIU will be connected to
• know which shelf maintenance panel port the EIU will be connected to
• know which passive devices will be connected to the EIU
• know which EIU port to connect the passive devices to
Note: The SMI software internally labels EIU ports 1 to 8 as “West plane”
and EIU ports 9 to 16 as “East plane”. As a result, the “Unassigned Optical
System Identifier” minor, nsa alarm is raised when the same band and
DWDM type OMXs are connected to the same EIU plane. To avoid this,
you can choose to connect the same band and same DWDM type OMXs
in different EIU planes.
• have the correct number of data communications cables (NT0H4322

[9.8 ft], or NT0H4345 [5 ft]):
— one data communication cable to connect the EIU to the shelf
maintenance panel
— one data communication cable for each passive device to connect the
passive device to the EIU
—continued—


Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations
Action
Step Action
1 Install the EIU in the same rack as the shelf and the equipment that will
connect to the EIU. See Procedure 4-22 “Installing and grounding the
Equipment Inventory Unit (NT0H43HA)” in Installing 5200 Shelves and
Components, 323-1701-201.
2 Connect power to the EIU. See Procedure 6-13 “Connecting power to an
Equipment Inventory Unit” in Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,
323-1701-201.
3 Deprovision the passive devices (currently connected to the shelf
maintenance panel) that must be connected to the EIU as follows:
a. In the System Manager, click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list,
and double-click on the shelf connected to the passive device that you
want to deprovision.
The System Manager updates the screen with data for the selected shelf.
b. Click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list to return the screen to full
view.
c. Select the Equipment/Inventory tab.
d. Double-click on the line that contains the passive device that you want to
deprovision.
The 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box appears.
e. Take note of the values in the OSID and Description fields. These values
are required later in the procedure.
Note: Only OMXs have the OSID field.
f. In the State area of the 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box, select OOS
from the Administrative drop-down list.
g. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The Confirm Inventory OOS dialog box appears.
h. Click Yes to confirm the change.
i. Right click on the passive device to be deleted from the inventory.
j. Select Delete from the drop-down list.
The Confirm Inventory Delete dialog box appears.
k. Click Yes to confirm the change.
l. Repeat substeps a. to k. for each passive device.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Disconnect and remove all data communication cables between the

deprovisioned passive devices and the shelf maintenance panel.
5 Wait five minutes to allow the passive devices to be deleted from the
Equipment Inventory screen.
Note: At this point, the Equipment Inventory in the SMI can still display the
passive devices.
6 Click the Refresh button to verify that the passive devices are no longer
displayed in their respective Equipment Inventory screens.
7 Connect the Equipment Inventory Unit to the shelf maintenance panel. See
Procedure 7-16 “Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the
maintenance panel” in Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,
323-1701-201.
8 Provision EIU data as follows:
and double-click on the shelf connected to the EIU.
view.
d. Click on the Refresh button.
e. Verify that the EIU Oper state is IS-NR.
f. Right click on the EIU.
g. Select Modify from the drop-down list.
h. If necessary, in the Description field, enter a description.
i. Click OK to close the dialog box.
9 Connect the passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit. See
Procedure 7-14 “Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit
in new installations” in Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,
323-1701-201.
—continued—


Step Action
10 Provision passive device data.

and double-click on the shelf connected to the EIU.
view.
d. Click on the Refresh button.
e. Double click on the EIU.
f. Verify that the Oper state is IS-NR for all passive devices connected to
the EIU.
g. Double click on the passive device.
h. If necessary, in the OSID field, enter an OSID.
Note: Only OMXs have the OSID field.
i. If necessary, in the Description field, enter a description.
j. Click OK to close the dialog box.
k. Repeat substep g. to j. for each passive device connected to the EIU.
—end—

Procedure 7-16
Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the
maintenance panel
Follow this procedure to connect the Equipment Inventory Unit (EUI) to the
shelf maintenance panel using the NT0H4322 cable (9.8 ft) or the NT0H4345
cable (5 ft).
The Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) drawer allows up to 16 passive devices

to be inventoried per shelf. The EIU is connected to the shelf maintenance
panel (5200 or 5100), then the individual passive devices are connected to the
EIU. Inside the maintenance panel of each shelf are two OMX interface
(OMXI) cards that allow the System Manager to inventory and monitor the
equipment.
When you complete this procedure the EIU data communications cable
(NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) is connected between the EIU and the
maintenance panel.

CAUTION
Requirements
You must have completed the procedures to mount a 5200 shelf (12 U high)
in a rack or cabinet, before you begin this procedure. Also, you must have
completed the procedure for mounting an EIU. Refer to the “Installing 5200
shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures.
—continued—


Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel
Table 7-26 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure.
Table 7-26
Tools and materials for connecting the EIU to the maintenance panel
Data communications cable 1 yes
(NT0H4322 or NT0H4345)
Ferrite bead 1 yes (with shelf installation kit)
Precautions
DANGER
Action
Step Action
1 If the maintenance panel is not open, loosen the thumbscrews and remove
the left maintenance panel cover to access the interface cards.
2 Insert one end of the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345)
through the access slot in the left side of the maintenance panel.
3 Insert the connector in the OMXI port 1 (top) or 2 (bottom) on one of the OMXI
cards in the maintenance panel. See Figure 7-44 on page 7-94.
4 Clamp the ferrite around the data communications cable.
ferrite as required. The ferrites can be mounted one on top of each other,
laced together.
—continued—


Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel
Step Action
6 Route the data communications cable from the shelf maintenance panel to
the right side of the EIU as follows:
a. Along the left side of the shelf, run the data communications cable
b. Run the data communications cable from the left side of the shelf
maintenance panel to the right side of the EIU using one of the following
methods:
— through the fiber management trough on any 5200 shelf (see Figure
7-43 on page 7-94)
— through the cable trough at the top of the bay
— through any other cable management hardware provided by the
customer
c. Along the right side of the shelf, run the data communications cable
through the vertical fiber brackets to reach the EIU.
d. On the right side of the EIU, use the cable management bracket to
provide strain relief for the data communications cable that you are
connecting to the EIU.
Note: If the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) is a bit
too long, use the vertical fiber brackets on the left or right side of the shelf to
route the extra length (see Figure 7-43 on page 7-94).
7 Insert the other end of the data communications cable in the port labelled “To
Shelf” on the front of the EIU (see Figure 7-45 on page 7-95).
—end—

Figure 7-43
Routing the data communications cable right from the EIU and left into the maintenance panel
OM2409p
Figure 7-44
OMX cable jacks in the maintenance panel
OM0150t

Figure 7-45
OM3642.jpg


8-1
Installing circuit packs 8-

Use the procedures in this chapter to install 5200 circuit packs, small form
factor pluggable (SFP) and large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules, or filler
cards.
Security policy
ATTENTION
The 565/5100/5200 is capable of meeting the security requirements of
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2. One requirement in
being FIPS 140-2 compliant is the application of tamper-evident seals to the
shelves. For all information related to the 565/5100/5200 and the security
requirements of FIPS 140-2, see Security Policy (NT0H64BA).
Before you begin

Requirements
All tools and materials tables include a check box for you to ensure that you
have all the required materials for an installation. Table 8-1 lists the tools and
materials that you require to complete the procedures in this chapter.
Table 8-1
Tools and materials required to install circuit packs

Antistatic wrist strap 1 no
Precautions
CAUTION

8-2 Installing circuit packs
CAUTION
Handling circuit packs

To avoid possible damage to circuit packs by electrostatic discharge (ESD),
follow these precautions:
• Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit packs.
• Keep circuit packs in their antistatic bags until you are ready to install
them.
• Remove circuit packs from their antistatic bags and install them directly
into the unit. Do not pass circuit packs to another person.
• If you have to put a circuit pack down, put the circuit pack back into its
antistatic bag first.
• Handle circuit packs by their handles only. Do not touch the electronic
components or any exposed printed circuitry.
• Limit your movement during installation to reduce the build-up of static
electricity.
Procedure list
All procedure lists include a check box for you to keep track of where you are
in an installation. Place a check mark in this column when you are performing
the procedure. Table 8-2 lists the procedures in this chapter.
Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 8-1 related to applying tamper-evident

seals.
Table 8-2
Circuit pack installation procedures
8-1 Inserting circuit packs 8-4 Required.
8-2 Installing an ETS Comms 8-7 Required when using an ETS.

module in an ETS shelf


Circuit pack installation procedures
8-3 Installing an ETS Switch 8-9 Required when using an ETS.

module in an ETS shelf
8-4 Installing a small form factor 8-12 Required when using a circuit pack with pluggable
pluggable (SFP) or large form modules (for example, a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s, a
factor pluggable (XFP) module Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack, a
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack, a
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit
pack, a Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH circuit pack, a
Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH+Video circuit pack, a
Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit
pack, an OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, an OTR 10
Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, an OTR 4 Gbit/s FC
circuit pack, an OTR 10G Quad circuit pack, or an
OTR 10G Quad with Encryption) circuit pack.
8-5 Inserting filler cards 8-24 Required for all empty slots in a shelf. Slot 20
requires a filler card if your configuration does not
include an OSC.

Procedure 8-1
Inserting circuit packs
Follow this procedure to insert circuit packs in a 5200 shelf.

• the circuit packs are inserted but are not seated in the 5200 shelf
• follow Procedure 8-5 to install filler cards in all the empty slots in the shelf
Requirements
Before you begin this procedure:
• the 5200 shelf must be mounted in a rack or cabinet. Refer to the
“Installing 5200 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the
required procedures.
• You must wear an antistatic wrist strap throughout this procedure.
• If your network plan does not require circuit packs in all the slots, you must
insert filler cards in the unused slots of the shelf.
• You must be familiar with circuit pack slot placement rules within a shelf.
Refer to “Site requirements and equipping rules” in Network Planning and
Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.
• You must be familiar with circuit pack compatibility rules. Refer to “General
circuit pack information” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Precautions
Inspect the backplane to make sure that connector pins are straight and that
the backplane is free of any packaging materials or other debris. You can then
insert circuit packs in the shelf according to your network configuration and
protection scheme.
In this procedure, you insert the circuit packs in the shelf but you do not
engage them in the backplane and lock them in position.
CAUTION
Follow the ESD safety precautions listed under “Handling
circuit packs” on page 8-2 in this chapter.
—continued—


Inserting circuit packs
Expected results
• the circuit packs are inserted but are not seated in the 5200 shelf
• follow Procedure 8-5 to install filler cards in all the empty slots in the shelf
Action
Step Action
1 Put on an antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounded point.

2 Remove the shelf cover by releasing the lock latches on the sides and lifting
the door off its pivots, as shown in Figure 8-1 on page 8-6.
DANGER
Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Do not let go of the shelf cover when you open it. The
shelf cover is not permanently attached to the shelf.
You must remove the door completely. If you let go of
the door when you open it, you can cause personal
injury, damage to the equipment, or both.
3 Visually inspect the backplane to make sure that connector pins are straight
and that the backplane is free of any packaging materials or other debris.
4 Make sure that the indicator lamps (LED) are at the top of the circuit pack
before you attempt to position it in the shelf.
5 Carefully line up the top and bottom of the circuit pack with the plastic guides
in the slot opening.
ATTENTION
During an installation, you insert the circuit packs in the shelf but you do not
seat them in the backplane and lock them into position.
6 Keep the lock latches flat against the faceplate so the circuit pack does not
seat into the backplane connector. Carefully slide the circuit pack toward the
back of the shelf until it stops.
7 Repeat step 4 through step 6 until all the circuit packs are in their correct
positions in the circuit pack receptacle.
8 Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 8-1 related to applying tamper-evident
seals.
—end—

Figure 8-1
Removing the shelf cover
OM0138t

Procedure 8-2
Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf
Use this procedure to install the Enhanced Trunk Switch communications
(ETS Comms) module into the ETS shelf if an ETS shelf is already installed
in the rack.
The ETS consists of three components: the shelf, the comms module, and the
switch module. Each item is shipped in individual boxes.
For more information on the Enhanced Trunk Switch, see “Enhanced Trunk
Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, bear the following rules in mind:
• install the three components of the ETS in following order:
— first, install the ETS shelf (Procedure 4-18)
— second, install the ETS Comms module by using this procedure
(Procedure 8-2)
— third, install the ETS Switch module (Procedure 8-3)
• in this release, you must always install the ETS Switch module in the
right-most slot of the ETS shelf. For correct operation, the ETS Comms
module must be installed in the left-most slot of the ETS shelf (see Figure
8-2).
Action
Step Action
1 Remove the Enhanced Trunk Switch comms module (see Figure 8-2) from its
protective packaging.
2 Pull the Nylatch fasteners into the “out” position (see Figure 8-3).
3 Line the ETS Comms module up with the left-most slot of the ETS shelf.
4 With your fingers on the front panel of the ETS Comms module, push the
module into the slot. Do not push on the Nylatch fasteners. It is normal to feel
some resistance as the connector on the module engages the backplane
connector.
Note: The module is seated correctly when the front flange of the module is
flush against the front flange of the ETS shelf.
—continued—


Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf
Step Action
5 When the ETS Comms module is seated, push forward on the Nylatch
fasteners until they snap into the “in” position.
6 If the ETS shelf is powered and the ETS Comms module is seated correctly,
the CARD LED lights (yellow). The CARD LED turns green after the module
is initialized.
7 Press the INIT button on the ETS Comms module. Wait at least one minute
for the ETS Comms module to reinitialize before continuing with another
procedure.
—end—
Figure 8-2
Enhanced Trunk Switch Comms module
OM2636p
Figure 8-3 shows the Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module.
Figure 8-3
Nylatch fastener in the out position
OM2706p
Nylatch

Procedure 8-3
Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf
Use this procedure to install the Enhanced Trunk Switch (ETS) switch module
in the ETS shelf if the ETS shelf is already installed in the rack.
The ETS consists of three components: the shelf, the comms module, and the
switch module. Each item is shipped in individual boxes.
For more information on the Enhanced Trunk Switch, see “Enhanced Trunk
Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, bear the following rules in mind:
• install the three components of the ETS in following order:
— first install the ETS shelf (Procedure 4-18)
— second install the ETS Comms module (Procedure 8-2)
— third, install the ETS Switch module by using this procedure
(Procedure 8-3)
• in this release, you must always install the ETS Switch module (see Figure
8-4) in the right-most slot of the ETS shelf. For correct operation, the ETS
Comms module must be installed in the left-most slot of the ETS shelf.
Action
Step Action
1 Remove the ETS Switch module from its protective packaging (see Figure
8-4).
2 Pull the Nylatch fasteners into the “out” position (see Figure 8-5).
3 Line the ETS Switch module up with the right-most slot of the ETS shelf.
4 With your fingers on the front panel of the ETS Switch module, gently push
the module into the slot. Do not push on the Nylatch fasteners. It is normal to
feel some resistance as the connector on the module engages the backplane
connector.
Note: The ETS Switch module is seated correctly when the front flange of
the module is flush against the front flange of the ETS shelf.
—continued—


Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf
Step Action
5 When the ETS Switch module is seated, push forward on the Nylatch
fasteners until they snap into the “in” position.
6 Select the required hazard laser safety label as follows.
If the ETS Switch module is used on Then
an unamplified network apply a hazard 3A laser safety
label above the ETS Switch
module
a preamplified network and apply a 3A safety label above the
the ETS Switch module is located ETS Switch module
before the preamplifier
a preamplified network and apply a hazard laser safety label
the ETS Switch module is located after above the ETS Switch module
the preamplifier
7 Apply the required hazard laser safety label on the ETS shelf, just above the
ETS Switch module. The hazard safety labels are part of the ETS installation
kit (see Figure 8-6). Align the bottom of the label to the top of the ETS Switch
module. Align the left end of the label with the left end of the ETS Switch
module.
8 If the ETS shelf is powered and the ETS Switch module is seated correctly,
you can observe the following:
• CARD and AUTO LEDs are lit (green).
• MAJ LED is lit (red). This LED turn off after the fibers are connected and
a signal is present.
• MIN and PRI LEDs are lit (yellow). These LEDs turn off after the fibers
are connected and a signal is present.
—end—
Figure 8-4
ETS Switch module
OM2637p

Figure 8-5 shows the Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module.
Figure 8-5
Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module in the out position
OM2706p
Nylatch
Figure 8-6
Hazard laser safety label
OM2648p
Layer 1 (Sheet 2)
Consult technical practices for application of
appropriate hazard level label
HAZARD LEVEL 1
Background
HAZARD LEVEL 1M
2.25 in. REF
HAZARD LEVEL 3A
Kiss cut
HAZARD LEVEL k x 3A label outlines
0.250 in. 5 places
HAZARD LEVEL 3B
Made in Canada 210615992r000
2.00 in.
2.40 in. REF

Procedure 8-4
Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large
form factor pluggable (XFP) module
Use this procedure to install small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form
factor pluggable (XFP) modules into an optical interface circuit pack.
SFPs are supported on the

• Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH (MOTR 20G L2 ETH) circuit pack
• Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH+Video (MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video) circuit
pack
• Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH+Video Electrical (MOTR 20G L2
ETH+Video Electrical) circuit pack
• Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack
• Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack
• OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack
Note: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack also has line-side SFPs
(SFPLS). The OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack also has a line-side SFP
(SFPLS).
XFPs are supported on the

• MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
• OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack
• OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack
• OTR 10G Quad (QOTR 10G)
• OTR 10G Quad with Encryption (QOTR/E 10G)
You can perform this procedure when the circuit pack is carrying traffic on
other SFP ports and on the line side ports.
When you complete this procedure, the SFP and XFP modules are installed
in the circuit pack, as applicable, and dust caps cover empty XFP and SFP
cages.
—continued—


Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) module
Note 1: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with

receptacles (cages) for two line-side XFPs. The QOTR/E 10G and QOTR
10G circuit packs are each equipped with receptacles with four XFPs.
Port 1 and Port 2 are for the line side. Port 3 and Port 4 are for the client
side or you can provision them for the line side.
Note 2: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support
traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT
Extended Reach (ER) circuit pack do support traffic or SFP modules in
ports 9 and 10.
ATTENTION
Ciena has conducted failure mode analysis regarding the repeated insertion
and removal of small form factor pluggables (SFP) or a large form factor
pluggables (XFP). Under normal operating conditions, once inserted and
carrying live traffic, pluggables operate as fixed transceivers on current
565/5100/5200 circuit packs. However, if a pluggable is inserted and
removed repeatedly, it is possible for the electrical contacts on the pluggable
or the pluggable receptacle on the circuit pack to wear out prematurely.
Unnecessary or repeated insertions and removals are not considered
normal and accepted operating practice, and as such Ciena recommends
that this be avoided and that pluggable removal and insertion be performed
only as normal operating practice (for example, during maintenance, card
replacement and trouble clearing operations).
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, you
• must wear an antistatic wrist strap
• make sure that you have the correct type and number of SFP or XFP
modules.
Note: Figure 8-7, Figure 8-8, Figure 8-10 to Figure 8-13 show pluggable
modules used with the Muxponder circuit pack. Figure 8-14 show XFP
pluggable modules used with the QOTR 10G and the QOTR/E 10G circuit
packs. For details, refer to Chapter 13 of the Network Planning and Link
• make sure that you have the dust caps (Figure 8-9) that are provided with
the circuit pack to cover empty SFP or XFP receptacles. Dust caps are
recommended to prevent damage to empty SFP receptacles.
—continued—


Precautions
CAUTION
Traffic will be lost
When you replace an SFP or XFP module, traffic will be lost
during the entire duration of the procedure.
CAUTION
Follow the ESD safety precautions listed under “Handling
circuit packs” on page 8-2 in this chapter.
CAUTION
Risk of affecting traffic on adjacent SFP modules
Because of the close proximity of adjacent in-service SFP
modules, there is a significant risk of mechanical interference
when you add or remove SFP modules, which causes traffic
errors. Do not disturb the fibers connected to the
traffic-carrying SFP ports. Use the universal fiber tool, which is
provided with the circuit packs, to connect and disconnect the
client optical fiber patchcords to reduce the risk.
CAUTION
Risk of network reliability
Make sure that all fiber connectors are cleaned before you
make the connections (or reconnections) described in this
chapter. For cleaning information, see Procedure 10-5,
“Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing”.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge
Observe all antistatic precautions when handling circuit packs.
Refer to “Handling circuit packs” on page 8-2.
—continued—


Expected results
When you complete this procedure, the required number of SFP modules are
installed in the appropriate circuit packs as listed on page 8-12 and the
required number of XFP modules are installed in the appropriate circuit packs
as listed on page 8-12 and dust caps cover empty XFP and SFP receptacles.
Action
Step Action
1
CAUTION
Risk of failure to autoprovision
Do not insert an SFP in the circuit pack while it is
booting. Once the status LED is solid green the circuit
pack is ready to receive the SFP. Otherwise, the SFP
may fail to autoprovision and will require a reseat to
correct.
2 Wear an antistatic wrist strap and foot straps to protect the equipment from
static damage. Connect the wrist strap to an available earth point.
3 Remove the dust cap from the pluggable receptacle on the optical interface
circuit pack. Store the dust cap in an appropriate location.
4 Remove the pluggable (Figure 8-7 on page 8-17) from its box.
5 Open the latch of the new pluggable module and review the related
illustrations (Figure 8-10 on page 8-19 to Figure 8-14 on page 8-23) to make
sure that you insert the pluggable module in the correct orientation.
—continued—


Step Action
6 Slide the new pluggable into the appropriate circuit pack receptacle making
sure to orient the pluggable as follows before insertion.
If you are installing a Then orient the pluggable such that the
pluggable on a pluggable
MOTR 20G L2 ETH or latch opens towards the left on the XFPs
MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video latch opens towards the right on the SFPs that
in a 5200 are inserted on the left side (ports 7, 9, 11, and
13)
latch opens towards the left on the SFPs that
are inserted on the right side (slots 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,
10, 12, and 14)
MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video latch opens towards the left on the XFPs
Electrical latch opens towards the right on the SFPs that
in a 5200 are inserted on the left side (ports 3 and 4)
latch opens towards the left on the SFPs that
are inserted on the right side (slots 5 and 6)
MOTR 10 Gbit/s latch opens towards the right when the SFP
in a 5200 has to be inserted into an odd numbered SFP
receptacle
latch opens towards the left when the SFP has
to be inserted into an even numbered SFP
receptacle
MOTR 10 Gbit/s OTN latch opens towards the left
4xOC48/STM16
in a 5200
MOTR 2.5 Gbit/s latch opens towards the left
in a 5200
OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra or OTR latch opens towards the right of the shelf
10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE
in a 5200
OTR 4 Gbit/s FC latch opens towards the left
in a 5200
QOTR 10G or QOTR/E 10G latch opens towards the left
in a 5200
—continued—


Step Action
7 Close the pluggable latch and then completely slide the pluggable into the
receptacle until it locks into place.
Note 1: If the pluggable latch is not folded back before you slide the
pluggable into the receptacle of the circuit pack, the pluggable can get stuck.
Note 2: Figure 8-10 shows how to slide the XFP module and SFP module
into a MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack and a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit
pack. Figure 8-11 shows how to slide the XFP module and SFP module into
a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack. Figure 8-12 shows how
to slide the SFP module into the SFP receptacle of a MOTR 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC circuit pack. Figure 8-13 shows how to slide the SFP module into the
SFP receptacle of a MOTR 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack (OTR 4 Gbit/s FC and
MOTR 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 are similar). Figure 8-14 shows how
to slide the XFP module into the XFP receptacle of an OTR 10G Quad with
Encryption circuit pack.
8 Remove the protective connector caps from the pluggables.
9 Clean the fiber connector and the SFP or XFP adapter housings. See
Procedure 10-1, “Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or
duplex)” and Procedure 10-5, “Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing”
in this document.
10 Connect the fibers to the SFP or XFP pluggable and the coaxial cables using
the procedures in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
—end—
Figure 8-7
SFP module (photo)
OM3652.jpg

Figure 8-8
SFP module
OM2913p
Note: The XFP module is larger than the SFP module.
Figure 8-9
Dust caps for XFP and SFP ports
OM3298.jpg

Figure 8-10
Installing pluggable modules into a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack
OM3301.jpg

Figure 8-11
Installing pluggable modules into a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
OM3300.jpg

Figure 8-12
Installing an SFP module into a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack

Figure 8-13
Installing an SFP module into a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack
OM2921t

Figure 8-14
Installing an XFP into an OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack
OM3472.jpg

Procedure 8-5
Inserting filler cards
Follow this procedure to insert and seat filler cards in a 5200 shelf.
OCLD filler cards

OCLD filler cards (NT0H52BA) have FC connectors on the faceplate.
The OCLD filler card is mandatory if you are using the OMX (Standard) tray
to hold unused pigtails. Install OCLD filler cards in any empty slots 1-4 and
15-18. Connect the pigtails from the OMX (Standard) tray to the FC
connectors on the corresponding OCLD filler card to protect the fibers and the
connectors. This arrangement also ensures that the pigtails are routed to the
correct location in the event that you have to install a new OCLD circuit pack
quickly.
The OCLD filler card may also be used in any shelf if you want to pre-fiber any
OMX variant other than the OMX (Standard) tray. Install OCLD filler cards in
any empty slots 1-8 and 11-18.
Note: Pre-fibering is an optional exercise. Pre-fibering is not mandatory.
LC filler cards
LC filler cards (NT0H52DA) have LC connectors on the faceplate. Install LC
filler cards in any empty slots 1-8 and 11-18. The LC filler card is used if you
want to pre-fiber any OMX variant other than the OMX (Standard) tray.
Note: Pre-fibering is an optional exercise. Pre-fibering is not mandatory.
Connect the patchcords from the OMX tray to the LC connectors on the
corresponding LC filler card to protect the fibers and the connectors. This
arrangement also ensures that the patchcords are routed to the correct
location in the event that you have to install a new circuit pack quickly.
—continued—


OFA filler cards

OFA filler cards (NT0H52CA) have SC connectors on the faceplate that are
used to connect unused patchcords from the ECT. OFA circuit packs are four
slots wide, but OFA filler cards are only one slot wide. If you have an ECT
installed with an OFA shelf, install one OFA filler card, and three blank filler
cards, for every group of four unused slots in the OFA shelf. This arrangement
protects the fibers and connectors, and also ensures that the fibers are routed
to the correct location in the event that you have to install a new OFA circuit
pack quickly.
If you are not using an ECT with an OFA shelf, you can use blank filler cards
for any empty slots in the shelf.
Valid slot assignments for OFA filler cards are 1, 5, 11, and 15.
Blank filler cards

Blank filler cards (NT0H52AA) have no connectors, and are installed in all
other unused slots in DWDM or OFA shelves.
Figure 8-15 on page 8-28 shows an OCLD filler card, an OFA filler card, and
three blank filler cards.
Filler cards
Release 11.0 introduces the two following filler cards (see Figure 8-16 on
page 8-29):
• OSC filler card for electrical video applications (NTLW52EAE6)
The OSC filler card for electrical video applications must be used if the
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack is installed in a 5200
shelf. The filler card can be used in slot 20 of a 5200 shelf.
• Filler card with straight faceplate (NT0H52ABE6)
It is recommended that the filler card with straight faceplate be used for
the empty OMX slot in a 565 shelf.
—continued—


Requirements
Before you begin this procedure, the 5200 shelf must be mounted in a rack or
cabinet. Refer to the “Installing 5200 shelves and equipment” on page 4-1
chapter of this book for the required procedures.
ATTENTION
You must use filler cards in slots that do not have active circuit packs. Filler
cards protect the connectors on the backplane from dust and debris, and
improve the efficiency of cooling the shelf.
For DWDM shelves with OMX (Standard) trays, you must identify the unused
pigtails and make sure you have enough OCLD filler cards to hold the pigtails.
For an OFA shelf, you must identify the empty slots, and make sure that you
have enough OFA filler cards, and blank filler cards, for the empty OFA slots.
You must wear an antistatic wrist strap throughout this procedure.
Precautions
DANGER
Action
Step Action
1 Put on an antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounded point.

—continued—


Step Action
2 Remove the shelf cover by releasing the lock latches on the sides and lifting
the door off its pivots, as shown in Figure 8-1 on page 8-6.
DANGER
Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Do not let go of the shelf cover when you open it. The
shelf cover is not permanently attached to the shelf.
You must remove the door completely. If you let go of
the door when you open it, you can cause personal
injury, damage to the equipment, or both.
3 Visually inspect the backplane to make sure that connector pins are straight
and that the backplane is free of any packaging materials or other debris.
4 For OCLD and OFA filler cards, make sure that the Tx connector is at the top
of the card before you attempt to position it in the shelf.
5 Carefully line up the top and bottom of the filler card with the plastic guides in
the slot opening.
6 Carefully slide the filler card toward the back of the shelf but do not engage
the card into the backplane connector.
7 Repeat step 4 through step 6 until all the filler cards are in place.
8 Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 8-1 related to applying tamper-evident
seals.
—end—

Figure 8-15
OCLD, OFA, and blank filler cards
OM0308p
FLR
C-BAND
OFA FLR
TX OUT
IN
RX
CAUTION
Invisible Laser
Radiation
Avoid Exposure
To Beam
OCLD OFA Blank

filler card filler card filler cards

Figure 8-16
OSC filler card for electrical video applications and Filler card with straight
faceplate
OM3374.jpg


9-1
Fiber management 9-
Use the procedures in this chapter to manage the fiber from 5200 components
and equipment.
Before you begin

It is important to clean all the fibers and optical connectors before you install
them and make connections. All cleaning procedures are in Chapter 10
“Cleaning connectors”.
It is also important that you accurately label all the fibers as you install them
and make the connections to your equipment. Troubleshooting, maintenance,
and upgrade tasks will be simplified if all connections are clearly understood
before undertaking any of these activities. For labeling information, see
Procedure 9-1.
When installing the 5200 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack,
it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the
customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena
recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers for the
5200 shelves and equipment.

9-2 Fiber management
Requirements
All tools and materials tables include a check box for you to ensure that you
have all the required materials for an installation. Table 9-1 lists the tools and
materials that you require to complete all the procedures in this chapter.
Table 9-1
Tools and materials required to manage fiber
Fiber termination labels as required no
Curly locks or Velcro cable ties as required no for most

equipment
yes with the
OMX 16CH
DWDM
installation
kit
Precautions
CAUTION
CAUTION
Handling optical fibers

When you work with optical fibers, you must take these precautions:
• Wear safety glasses when you install optical fibers.
• Never look into an active optical fiber or the optical fiber connector
opening of an active or powered-up unit.

• Prevent direct exposure to optical fiber ends or optical connector ends

where you can directly access the laser signal.
DANGER
Risk of eye injury
If you have a piece of a glass in your eye, get medical
assistance immediately.
• Wear rubber gloves when you clean optical connectors. The gloves
prevent direct contact with the isopropyl alcohol and prevent
contamination of the ferrules with skin oils.
• Place all optical fiber clippings in a plastic container provided for that
purpose.
• Handle optical fibers with caution. Place the optical fibers in a safe location
during installation.
• Protect all optical fiber connectors with clean dust caps at all times.
• Follow the manufacturer instructions when you use an optical test set.
Incorrect calibration or control settings can create hazardous levels of
radiation.
Procedure list
All procedure lists include a check box for you to keep track of where you are
in an installation. Place a check mark in this column when you are performing
the procedure. Table 9-2 lists the procedures in this chapter.
Table 9-2
Fiber management procedures
Procedure Page √
9-1 Labeling cables and optical fibers 9-5
9-2 Guidelines for labeling the fibers and cables in an OFA installation kit 9-11
9-3 Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager 9-16

9-4 Guidelines for routing fiber in a equipment drawer equipped with tray 9-21
assemblies
9-5 Routing fibers for optical circuit packs 9-26
9-6 Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack 9-29
9-7 Routing coaxial cables for the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video 9-46
Electrical circuit pack
9-8 Routing fibers for an OTR 10G Quad or OTR 10G Quad with 9-50
Encryption


Fiber management procedures
Procedure Page √
9-9 Routing fibers from the OMX (Standard) tray 9-57
9-9 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM 9-63
9-11 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH 9-68
Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz
9-12 Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 9-74
100 GHz
9-13 Routing fibers for the ECT tray 9-80
9-14 Routing fibers for the OSC tray 9-83
9-15 Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps 9-87
9-16 Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot (for 9-91

Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, only)
9-17 Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray 9-93
Note: You must perform Procedure 9-16 on page 9-91 before you route
fibers for a Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10),
NT0H59AC.
9-18 Routing fibers for the patch panel 9-100
9-19 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or the OMX 4CH CWDM 9-111
with dual taps
9-20 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU 9-120
CWDM
9-21 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 9-131
4CH OADM ITU CWDM
9-22 Routing fiber for the Optical Trunk Switch 9-137

9-23 Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch 9-139
9-24 Routing fibers for the PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz 9-141
9-25 Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler 9-145
9-26 Routing fibers for the C&L Splitter/Coupler 9-149
9-27 Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA 9-153
9-28 Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer 9-157

Procedure 9-1
Labeling cables and optical fibers
Use this procedure to apply labels to both ends of all cables and optical fibers
as shown in Figure 9-1. To label cables and fibers, use Panduit labels printed
through Microsoft Excel or the fiber tags provided with the HIP OFAs.
Panduit labels are provided on a standard 8.5x11 letter size sheet. Each sheet
contains 49 labels. The label template use printing information pre-configured
for the Panduit label sheet and should not require adjustment. If required,
minor cell formatting can be conducted for proper alignment.
The fiber tags provided with the HIP OFAs describe various Hazard Levels
present at different connectors in the system during operation of the HIP
amplifier. For more information about the fiber tags, refer to the chapter
“Observing safety guidelines” of this book.You may have to apply fiber tags.
To apply these fiber tags, peel, roll and stick the appropriate Hazard Level on
to the fiber plugging into the passive products.
Figure 9-1
Label application diagram
DX0428
Labels applied here
Precautions
• Apply labels approximately 3” to 6” (or 75 mm to 150 mm) from the fiber
boot.
• Labels should be applied to the patch cord in a fashion that does not
create micro bends.
Requirements
• Make sure you have installed all fibers.
—continued—


Table 9-3 lists the tools and materials that you require to complete this
procedure.
Table 9-3
Tools and materials required to label cables and optical fibers
If using the Panduit label method, a PC (or laptop) 1 no

with Microsoft Excel running the installation fiber
labeling template
If using the Panduit label method, InkJet quality 1 no
printer (or better)
Fiber termination labels as required no
Expected results
You have marked with labels all the fibers that connect to the 5200 network
element.
Action
Step Action
1 If you are labeling cables and optical fibers Then complete

using
Panduit labels step 2 through step 7
HIP OFA fiber tags step 8 through step 11
Note: These fibers tags are necessary if
HIP OFA modules are used.
2 Enter the appropriate information into the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Information is inserted into the appropriate cells, and will be printed in the
corresponding label (see Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3).
Note: Only labels 1 through 14 are shown in the following illustration. There
are 49 labels per sheet.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 9-2
Identification areas on a label
DX0429
XXXXXXX
White vinyl
designation area Transparent
"Mylar" area
Customer's
designation
(as required)
Figure 9-3
Panduit label spreadsheet
OM3694
Origin atio n Termin atio n
Label Rack Shelf Slo t / Port Rack Shelf Slot / Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3 Print the Panduit labels. See Figure 9-4 for examples of Panduit labels.
Figure 9-4
Panduit fiber labels (example)
OM3695
To : 10 0.01 Sh 1 To: 100.02 Sh 2 To: 100 .03 Sh 3
100 0.01 (TX ) 10 00.02 (TX ) 1000 .03 (TX )
Fr: 20 0.01 Sh 1 Fr: 20 0.02 Sh 2 Fr: 20 0.03 Sh 3
200 0.01 (RX ) 20 00.02 (RX ) 2000 .03 (RX )
—continued—


Step Action
4 Place the adhesive side of the label underneath the cable at a right angle.
Apply labels approximately 3 in. to 6 in. (75 mm to 150 mm) from the fiber
boot. The cable should lie along the boundary between the white portion and
the clear portion of the label, ensuring the “To” and “From” information is
oriented toward the end of the fiber boot.
5 Fold the transparent portion of the label over the patch cord and press firmly
against the white side of the label. Ensure the label is completely sealed (see
Figure 9-5).
6 Repeat step 4 and step 5 for the opposite end of the cable.
Figure 9-5
Wrap the label around the cable of optical fiber
DX0430
Wrap
xxx
xxx
x
Clear area
7 Repeat this procedure for all other cables and optical fibers.
Note: Ciena recommends using duplicate labels with similar information at
the patch panels (when applicable) to effectively trace fibers from the
565/5100/5200 shelves to the patch panels.
You have completed this procedure if you are not labeling cables with HIP
OFA fiber tags. These tags are required if HIP OFA modules are used.
—continued—


Step Action
8 Peel the backing tape of the HIP OFA fiber tag to the second bar. Place the
starting point of the fiber tag on the fiber cable. Apply labels approximately 3”
to 6” (75 mm to 150 mm) from the fiber boot. See Figure 9-6 and Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-6
HIP OFA fiber tag starting point
OM1768t
Starting point
CAUTION CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
Avoid exposure to beam from exposed Avoid exposure to beam from exposed
fiber ends and connectors fiber ends and connectors
Do not view directly with optical Do not view directly with optical
instruments instruments
Figure 9-7
Peel backing tape away until the second bar
OM1769t
9 Wrap the fiber three times. See Figure 9-8.

Figure 9-8
Wrap the fiber three times and then stop
OM1770t
10 Stop wrapping when the second black bar is reached. See Figure 9-8.
—continued—


Step Action
Figure 9-9
Fold the text sections back to back
OM1771t
11 After the label is wrapped around the fiber, pull off the remaining backing tape
and fold the label caution text sections back to back. See Figure 9-9 and
Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10
Fold along the dotted line
OM1772t
Dotted
line
CAUTION CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
Avoid exposure to beam from exposed Avoid exposure to beam from exposed
fiber ends and connectors fiber ends and connectors
Do not view directly with optical Do not view directly with optical
instruments instruments
—end—

Procedure 9-2
Guidelines for labeling the fibers and cables in an
OFA installation kit
The OFA installation kit includes patch cords for connecting OFA circuit packs
to ECTs, and data communications cables for connecting ECTs to the
maintenance panel.
Because ECT configurations are flexible, loose labels are included in the OFA
installation kit to allow you to identify the patch cords and cables for your
configuration. Follow these guidelines to attach the loose labels to the patch
cords and cables, according to your configuration.
Labeling the patch cords

To label the patch cords, you have to know whether you intend you deploy the
ECT in a straddled or bookended configuration. For information about
straddled and bookended ECTs, see the procedure in Connection
Procedures, 323-1701-221.
Note: These guidelines apply only to patch cords for connecting OFA
circuit packs to ECTs—not for connecting ECTs to other optical
components such as OMXs, OSC trays, Optical Trunk Switches, or
Enhanced Trunk Switches.
—continued—


Guidelines for labeling the fibers and cables in an OFA installation kit
Action
Step Action
1 Identify the labels that you will attach to the end of the patch cords. Table 9-4
lists the features and uses of the SC/SC patch cords:
Table 9-4
SC/SC patch cord features
Patch cord Used to Affixed labels

pair (see Note 1)
Pair 1 connect OFA circuit pack in slot 4 to • OFA slot 4 IN
either upper or lower ECT tray (see • OFA slot 4 OUT
Note 2).

Note 2).

Note 2).

Note 2).
Note 1: Labels are affixed to the end of the patch cord that connects to the
OFA circuit pack. Attach the label at least four in. from the tip of the
connector on the end of the patch cord.
Note 2: The upper and lower ECT trays refer to the placement of the ECT
tray in the rack.
The loose labels that you will attach to the end of the patch cord that connects
to the ECT are:
• WEST ECT C IN
• WEST ECT C OUT
• WEST ECT L IN
• WEST ECT L OUT
• EAST ECT C IN
• EAST ECT C OUT
• EAST ECT L IN
• EAST ECT L OUT
—continued—


Step Action
2 Attach the loose labels to the ends of the SC-SC patch cords that connect to
the ECT.
If you intend to Then
deploy the ECT in a
straddled refer to Table 9-5
configuration
bookended refer to Table 9-6 on page 9-14
configuration
Table 9-5
Label placement for straddled configurations
If this label is affixed to the end that Then attach this label to the end that
connects to the OFA connects to the ECT
OFA SLOT 4 IN WEST ECT C OUT
OFA SLOT 4 OUT WEST ECT C IN
OFA SLOT 8 IN WEST ECT L OUT

OFA SLOT 8 OUT WEST ECT L IN
OFA SLOT 14 IN EAST ECT L OUT
OFA SLOT 14 OUT EAST ECT L IN
OFA SLOT 18 IN EAST ECT C OUT
OFA SLOT 18 OUT EAST ECT C IN
Note: Attach the label at least 4 in. from the tip of the connector on the end of the
patch cord.
—continued—


Step Action
Table 9-6
Label placement for bookended configurations
If this label is affixed to the end that Then attach this label to the end that
connects to the OFA connects to the ECT
OFA SLOT 4 IN EAST ECT C OUT
OFA SLOT 4 OUT WEST ECT C IN

OFA SLOT 8 IN EAST ECT L OUT
OFA SLOT 8 OUT WEST ECT L IN
OFA SLOT 14 IN WEST ECT L OUT
OFA SLOT 14 OUT EAST ECT L IN
OFA SLOT 18 IN WEST ECT C OUT
OFA SLOT 18 OUT EAST ECT C IN
Note: Attach the label at least 4 in. from the tip of the connector on the end of the
patch cord.
3 Attach the label to the data communications cables. Table 9-7 lists the feature
and uses of the data communications cables.
Table 9-7
Data communications cable features
Cable Used to
Long cable connect the lower ECT tray to either the right or left OMXI card in
the maintenance panel (see Note:).
Short cable connect the upper ECT tray to either the right or left OMXI card in
the maintenance panel (see Note:).
Note: The upper and lower ECT trays refer to the placement of the ECT tray in
the rack.
—continued—


Step Action
The loose labels that you will attach to the ends of the data communications
cables are:
• WEST ECT MONITOR
• EAST ECT MONITOR
• OMXI EAST 1
• OMXI WEST 1
4 If the Then attach the labels to the data
communications cables according to
east ECT is uppermost in the Table 9-8
rack
west ECT is uppermost in the Table 9-9
rack
Table 9-8
Label placement for east over west ECTs
Cable Attach this label to one end Attach this label to the other
end
long cable WEST ECT MONITOR OMXI WEST 1
short cable EAST ECT MONITOR OMXI EAST 1
Table 9-9
Label placement for west over east ECTs
Cable Attach this label to one end Attach this label to the other
end
long cable EAST ECT MONITOR OMXI EAST 1
short cable WEST ECT MONITOR OMXI WEST 1
—end—

Procedure 9-3
Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager
Follow these guidelines when you are routing slack fiber through the Fiber
Manager.
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of insufficient fiber slack
Be sure the Fiber Manager, and the equipment drawer from
which the fiber is being routed, are fully open before you begin
to route the fiber around the Fiber Manager spools. You must
leave sufficient slack in the fiber so that you can open the
equipment drawers without stretching the fiber.
CAUTION
Risk of fiber damage
Each Fiber Manager can manage a maximum of 16 fibers.
Each fiber spool in the equipment drawer can manage 1.6
meters of fiber (maximum 3 mm diameter). Do not stretch the
fiber, or wrap the fiber on the spools too tightly, or you risk
damaging the fiber. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties
to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager.
CAUTION
Risk of affecting network reliability
Fiber connectors should always be cleaned prior to making
connections to ensure network reliability.
ATTENTION
The Fiber Manager has two sliding fiber management components located
on the left and right sides of the equipment drawer. Each of these
components has two tabs that lock into position across the top of the dish, to
hold the routed fibers in position.
To open the tab to route fiber through the dish, press the tab toward the back
of the latch while you lift the tab. Press down on the tab to close it.
—continued—


Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager
CAUTION
Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber
Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 in. (30 mm) for the
patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in
the equipment drawer to route the fiber.
Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the
equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can
become stretched and damaged when the equipment drawer
is opened.
Guidelines for routing fiber

Guideline Detail
1 Make sure every fiber is labeled.
2 Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber.

Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than
1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber.
3 Fibers coming into the Fiber Manager from the left side should be routed
around the spools on the left side of the equipment drawer.
Fibers coming into the Fiber Manager from the right side should be
routed around the spools on the right side of the equipment drawer.
Note: Ciena recommends that fibers enter and exit the Fiber Manager
on the same side.
4 Route the fiber on the spools in the following order:

1 front spools ->bottom to top
2 rear spools ->bottom to top
5 Label each flip-up spool in the Fiber Manager.
6 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and
exiting the Fiber Manager.
Figure 9-11 on page 9-18 illustrates how to route slack fiber around the spools
in the Fiber Manager. Figure 9-12 on page 9-19 illustrates how to bundle the
fibers using curly locks. Figure 9-13 on page 9-20 illustrates how to bundle the
fibers using Velcro cables ties.
—end—

Figure 9-11
Routing slack fiber on spools in the Fiber Manager (NT0H57BB)
OM1803p

Figure 9-12
Bundling fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager (NT0H57BB) using curly locks
OM2356p

Figure 9-13
Bundling fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager (NT0H57BB) using Velcro cable ties
OM2357p

Procedure 9-4
Guidelines for routing fiber in a equipment drawer
equipped with tray assemblies
Follow these guidelines when you are routing fibers in and out of a equipment
drawer equipped with tray assemblies (such as OMX, OSC tray, OSC
splitter/coupler with dual taps, C&L splitter/coupler, ECT, PBE, Transponder
Protection Tray, Patch Panel, 1310 nm splitter/coupler and Discrete VOA).
Note: The 10-channel Transponder Protection Tray (NT0H59AC) and the

OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) or the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM
(NTPM35BA) are each designed with a hinged door that you open to
access ports (not a tray that you pull out). Fiber clips are provided to
manage the fiber entering and exiting the component. For fiber routing
instructions, refer to “Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray”
on page 9-93 and “Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX
8CH ITU CWDM” on page 9-120.
This procedure also provides guidelines to bundle fiber around bend radius
limiters inside a equipment drawer equipped with these tray assemblies.
Precautions
CAUTION
Make sure that the equipment drawer from which the fiber is
being routed is fully open before you begin to route the fiber
around the fiber bend radius limiters. You must leave sufficient
slack in the fiber so that you can open the equipment drawers
without stretching the fiber.
CAUTION
Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber on the fiber bend
radius limiters too tightly, or you risk damaging the fiber.
Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fibers
entering and exiting a equipment drawer. Always use curly
locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers around the bend
radius limiters inside a equipment drawer equipped with tray
assemblies.
—continued—


Guidelines for routing fiber in a equipment drawer equipped with tray assemblies
CAUTION
Fiber connectors should always be cleaned prior to making
connections to ensure network reliability.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to equipment and fiber
Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and
snapped into place before closing any equipment drawers.
Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the
fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the
minimum bend radius of 1.18 in. (30 mm) for the patch cords.
Always use the fiber management components in the

equipment drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in
the fibers entering and exiting the equipment drawers. If
sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and
damaged when the equipment drawer is opened.
—continued—


Guidelines for routing fiber in a equipment drawer equipped with tray assemblies

Guideline Detail
1 Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. If the equipment drawer has either
a beige non-spring-loaded locking clip or a red spring-loaded locking clip, follow the
instructions on page 9-72. Then continue with the guidelines on this page (page 9-23).
2 Make sure that every fiber is labeled.

3 Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right side or the left
side of the equipment drawer. To determine on which side you have to route the fibers
entering or exiting the tray, refer to the appropriate routing procedure in this chapter. Consult
your system diagram for site-specific details.
4 Fibers coming into the equipment drawer from the left side should be routed around the
bend radius limiters on the left side of the equipment drawer. Fibers coming into the
equipment drawer from the right side should be routed around the bend radius limiters on
the right side of the equipment drawer.
Route the fiber inside the equipment drawer according to the appropriate procedure in this
chapter. Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you
use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be
damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or
bend fiber.
Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Always use the fiber bend radius limiters to coil
excess fiber slack.
5 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers routed around the fiber bend radius
limiters to avoid loose fibers inside a equipment drawer.
Figure 9-14 on page 9-24 illustrates how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters in
a equipment drawer equipped with tray assemblies using curly locks. Figure 9-15 on page
9-25 illustrates how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters in a equipment drawer
equipped with tray assemblies using Velcro cables ties.
6 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the equipment
drawer. See Figure 9-12 on page 9-19 and Figure 9-13 on page 9-20.
Figure 9-12 on page 9-19 illustrates how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a
equipment drawer using curly locks. Figure 9-13 on page 9-20 illustrates how to bundle the
fibers exiting and entering a equipment drawer using Velcro cable ties.
—end—

Figure 9-14
Bundling fibers in a equipment drawer (equipped with tray assemblies) using curly locks
OM2358p

Figure 9-15
Bundling fibers in a equipment drawer (equipped with tray assemblies) using Velcro cables ties
OM2359p
Velcro cable ties
Closed
Open
B
O
RX
T
T
O
TX
P
B
O
T
RX
T
O
P
TX

Procedure 9-5
Routing fibers for optical circuit packs
Follow this procedure to route fiber-optic cables for optical circuit packs.
Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Precautions
recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.
If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split
flex tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the
equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.
DANGER
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to fiber-optic cables. Never look directly into the end
of a fiber-optic cable.
Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when
you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber.
Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in.
(76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.
Requirements
• Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 10 “Cleaning
connectors”).
• Make sure all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 9-1).
Expected results
All optical fibers are routed to the fiber trough and are ready for connection.
For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of
Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Locate the fiber raceways on the shelf, including the vertical fiber brackets,
the fiber management trough located just below the circuit packs (Figure
9-16) and the flexible fiber guide.
Figure 9-16
Fiber management trough on a shelf
OM3780
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
Maintenance panel
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
OCLD OCLD OCLD OCLD OCI OCI OCI OCI OCM OCM OCI OCI OCI OCI OCLD OCLD OCLD OCLD SP
Fiber raceway
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s Gb/s
LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS
ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE
STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS
BAND 4 CH1 BAND 4 CH2 BAND 4 CH3 BAND 4 CH4 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm BAND 4 CH4 BAND 4 CH3 BAND 4 CH2 BAND 4 CH1
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION
Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser Invisible Laser
Fiber raceway
Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation
Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure Avoid Exposure
To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam To Beam
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fiber management
trough
FAN
Cooling unit
STATUS
WEST OMX EAST OMX

OMX tray
BAND LOS BAND LOS
—continued—


Step Action
2 Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged
when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route
fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3
in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.
3 Fiber from the left side of the shelf should be routed through the vertical fiber
brackets on the left-side of the shelf, then into the fiber management trough
and up to the appropriate circuit pack.
Note: All fibers entering the shelf on the left side should be connected to the
circuit packs in slots 1 through 10. Consult your system diagram for
site-specific details.
4 Fiber from the right side of the shelf should be routed through the vertical fiber
brackets on the right-side of the shelf, then into the fiber management trough
and up to the appropriate circuit pack.
Note: All fibers entering the shelf on the right side should be connected to
the circuit packs in slots 11 to 20, with the exception of the OSC circuit pack
in slot 20. Instructions follow. Also, consult your system diagram for
When routing fibers for the OSC circuit pack in slot 20, do not route the
fibers upward from slot 20 to the associated OSC splitter/coupler tray
using the fiber guide on the right side of the shelf because you risk
violating the minimum fiber bend radius. Instead, use one of the following
alternative methods:
— route the fibers into a vertical fiber manager located at a distance of
over 2.4 in. from the center of the OSC circuit pack
— route the fibers to the left of the shelf (instead of to the right), then into
the fiber guide on the left side of the shelf, across the front of another
shelf, and finally up to the right side of the associated OSC
splitter/coupler tray drawer.
5 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and
exiting the shelf.
6 To route fibers from an OMX (Standard) tray, see Procedure 9-9 on page
9-57.
—end—

Procedure 9-6
Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack
Follow this procedure to route fiber-optic cables for a Muxponder circuit pack.
To route line-side fiber-optic cables and client-side fiber-optic cables for a

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical (MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video) circuit
pack, follow this procedure (Procedure 9-6 on page 9-29). To route client-side
coaxial cables, follow Procedure 9-7 on page 9-46 .
Precautions
Circuit packs must be inserted but not seated during fiber routing. Do not
connect fibers or cables to circuit packs at this time. In this procedure you
route fibers to the circuit pack. (For information on connecting fiber to circuit
packs, see Connections Procedures, 323-1701-221.)
When installing the 5200 shelves and equipment in a new or existing rack, it
is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the
DANGER
DANGER
Risk of laser radiation exposure
Do not stare into the beam or view directly with optical
instruments. The invisible laser radiation can cause personal
injury. 5200 is a Class 3A laser product.
—continued—


CAUTION
Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing
optical fiber. Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber.
Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less
than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be
damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in.
CAUTION
Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct wavelength
band and function (Add or Drop) information. Otherwise, you
can cause damage to equipment during and after
maintenance.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, you must make sure that
• all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 10 “Cleaning
connectors”)
• all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 9-1)
For the tools and materials required to route fibers for

• the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack and Muxponder 20G L2
ETH+Video circuit pack, see Table 9-10
• the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack, see Table 9-11.
For details related to coaxial cables, see Procedure 9-7 on page 9-46.
• all other Muxponder circuit packs, see Table 9-12
—continued—


Table 9-10
Tools and materials required to route fibers for the MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit
pack and MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack
Item Quantity Supplied
Line side: Single-mode fiber (SMF) duplex 2 for each circuit no

SC/PC-LC/PC cable with a straight boot on the pack (order from
SC connector and a 45-degree boot for the LC Ciena)
connector (see Note:).
Client side: LC to SC duplex fiber patch cords to 1 duplex patch cord no (order
connect the circuit pack (LC) to the patch panel for each SFP port from Ciena)
or subtending equipment (SC) and a 45-degree used
boot for the LC connector.
Single-mode fiber (SMF) required for 1310 nm
client interfaces (NT0H4320).
The pigtails of these 3 mm patch cords have a
fiber jacket diameter of 1.6 mm.
Short pieces of Velcro (for fiber routing) at least 2 no
Note: Refer to “Fiber-optic patch cords” in Network Planning and Link Engineering,
323-1701-110.
Table 9-11
Tools and materials required to route fibers for the MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video
Electrical circuit pack

connector (see Note 1).
Client side: Coaxial cable fitted with a Bayonet 8 for each circuit no (order
Neill-Conselman (BNC) connector (see Note 2). pack from Ciena)
Note 1: Refer to “Fiber-optic patch cords” in Network Planning and Link

Note 2: For routing instructions for coaxial cables, see Procedure 9-7 on page 9-46.
—continued—


Table 9-12
Tools and materials required to route fibers for the Muxponder circuit pack

connector (see Note:).
Client side: LC to SC duplex fiber patch cords to 1 duplex patch cord no (order
connect the circuit pack (LC) to the patch panel for each SFP port from Ciena)
or subtending equipment (SC) and a 45-degree used
Multimode fiber (MMF) required for 850 nm
Note: Refer to “Fiber-optic patch cords” in Network Planning and Link Engineering,
323-1701-110.
Expected results
All optical fibers (line side and client side, as applicable) are routed to the fiber
trough and are ready for connection to the Muxponder circuit pack. For routing
details for the client-side coaxial cables on the MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video
Electrical circuit pack, see Procedure 9-7 on page 9-46. For connection
procedures, see the “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures,
323-1701-221.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route fiber.

• Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged
when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you
route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is
less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.
• Route all fibers entering the shelf on the left side to the circuit packs in
slots 1 through 7. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
• Route all fibers entering the shelf on the right side to the circuit packs in
slots 11 through 17. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details
2 Bear in mind that for the MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack you
route
• client-side fiber by following step 6 and step 7 in this procedure
(Procedure 9-6) and
• line-side fiber by following step 8 and step 9 in this procedure
(Procedure 9-6) and
• client-side coaxial cables by following Procedure 9-7 on page 9-46
—continued—


Step Action
the fiber management trough located just below the circuit packs (see Figure
9-17).
Figure 9-17
OM3780
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
Maintenance panel
1
14
6
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
5
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fiber raceway
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Fiber raceway
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fiber management
trough
FAN
Cooling unit
STATUS
WEST OMX EAST OMX

OMX tray
BAND LOS BAND LOS
4 Route the duplex LC-SC optical patch cords (for line side and client side, as
applicable) through the vertical fiber brackets of the shelf, and through the
fiber management trough of the 5200 shelf.
• Route the fiber from the left side of the shelf through the vertical fiber
brackets on the left side of the shelf, then into the fiber management
trough.
• Route the fiber from the right side of the shelf through the vertical fiber
brackets on the right side of the shelf, then into the fiber management
trough.
—continued—


Step Action
5 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fiber exiting or entering the
shelf to the side of the shelf.
Routing client-side fibers between the shelf fiber management trough and the SFP ports on the
circuit pack
6 Manage fibers correctly, particularly when all the SFP ports of the Muxponder
circuit pack are used.
Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route fiber:
• Leave some fiber slack in the vertical fiber brackets of the 5200 shelf to
facilitate future installation and maintenance procedures.
Fiber slack can facilitate future disconnection of fiber from a single SFP
port. Without fiber slack, the user may have to disconnect the fibers of
neighboring SFP ports on the Muxponder circuit pack to access a single
SFP port (thereby possibly affecting traffic).
• Use only thin, short pieces of Velcro to organize the fiber bundles that
enter the exit aperture. This fiber bundling method prevents fiber pinching
by the shelf cover. Thin, short pieces of Velcro do not interfere with the
shelf front cover.
• Achieve the correct bend radius when you are routing fibers for
— SFP ports 9 or 10 (at the bottom). Make sure that the fibers in the
fiber bundle are as close as possible to the shelf front cover.
— SFP ports 11 to 14 (at the bottom) of the MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit
pack or the MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack. Make sure that
the fibers in the fiber bundle are as close as possible to the shelf front
cover.
— SFP ports 3 to 6 (at the bottom) of the MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video
Electrical circuit pack. Make sure that the fibers in the fiber bundle are
as close as possible to the shelf front cover.
Note 1: The MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack is equipped with 14 ports. Ports
1 and 2 are line ports. Ports 3 to 14 are client ports. The 12 client ports are
for 12 bidirectional Ethernet signals (for a total of 24 clients).
Note 2: The MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack is equipped with 14
ports. Ports 1 and 2 are line ports. Ports 3 to 14 are client ports. The 12 client
ports are for 4 bidirectional Ethernet signals (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional
video (8 clients), for a total of 16 client signals.
—continued—


Step Action
Note 3: To route client-side coaxial cables (ports 7 to 14), see Procedure 9-7
on page 9-46.
Note 4: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support
traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC
VCAT circuit pack does support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10.
Note 5: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is
equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port.
Note 6: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack is equipped with five ports.
Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port, which can also be provisioned
as a client port.
Note 7: The MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack is equipped
with 14 ports. Ports 1 and 2 are line ports. Ports 3 to 14 are client ports. Ports
3 to 6 are optical ports. These 4 client ports are for 4 bidirectional Ethernet
signals (for a total of 8 optical clients). Ports 7 to 14 are video ports. These 8
client ports are designed for coaxial cables fitted with Bayonet
Neill-Conselman (BNC) connectors.
Follow the following steps in this procedure (Procedure 9-6) to route
• client-side line-side fiber-optic cables (ports 3 to 6), follow step 6 and step
7
• line-side fiber-optic cables, follow step 8 and step 9
—continued—


Step Action
7 Route the fibers from the fiber management trough of the shelf to the SFP
port on the Muxponder circuit pack (see Figure 9-18 on page 9-40 to Figure
9-23 on page 9-45).
If the SFP port where the duplex LC Then make sure that you route the
connectors are to be connected is duplex fiber through the
on the left side of the faceplate of the left exit aperture of the fiber
• Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack or trough, under the Muxponder
circuit pack in question
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack or
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit
pack
on the right side of the faceplate of the right exit aperture of the fiber
• Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack or trough under the Muxponder in
question
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack or
• MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit
pack
on a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video right exit aperture of the fiber
Electrical circuit pack (ports 3 to 6) at trough under the Muxponder in
the bottom of the faceplate question
a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN right exit aperture of the fiber
4xOC48/STM16 trough (client fiber) and left exit
aperture of the fiber trough (line
fiber), under the MOTR 10 Gbit/s
OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack
a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s left of the fiber trough, under the
Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack
Note 1: Figure 9-18 on page 9-40 to Figure 9-23 on page 9-45 show fibers
and cables connected to the line-side and client-side pluggable modules, as
applicable.
Do not seat any type of Muxponder circuit pack into the shelf or connect the
fiber patch cords to the pluggable modules or coaxial cables to client-side
BNC ports now. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting
components” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
—continued—


Step Action
Note 2: Figure 9-18 on page 9-40 shows 12 SFP ports of a MOTR 20G L2
ETH+Video circuit pack. (The SFP ports of the MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit
pack look the same.)
Note 3: Figure 9-20 and Figure 9-21 show 10 SFP ports of a Muxponder
10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack. Bear in mind that the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and
10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER) circuit pack do support traffic or SFP
modules in ports 9 and 10.
Note 4: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is
equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports and port 5 is a line port.
Routing line-side fibers between the shelf fiber management trough and the circuit pack
8 Manage fibers correctly, particularly when all the SFP ports of the Muxponder
circuit pack are used.
Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route fiber:
• Rotate slightly the 45-degree boot on the line-side fiber LC connector so
that the duplex LC fibers are oriented on the left of the circuit pack
faceplate. This positioning facilitates the line-side fiber segregation from
the client-side fibers.
• Segregate the line-side fiber on the uppermost position of the faceplate
as much as possible from the client-side fibers.
Route the line-side fiber from the left-most position on the faceplate and
down through the right aperture.
For the Muxponder 20G circuit packs, route the line-side fibers down
through the left aperture.
• Fiber slack can facilitate future disconnection of fiber from a single SFP
port. Without fiber slack, the user may have to disconnect the fibers of
neighboring SFP ports on the Muxponder circuit pack to access a single
SFP port (thereby possibly affecting traffic).
shelf front cover.
—continued—


Step Action
9 Route the fibers from the fiber management trough of the shelf to the line port
of the Muxponder circuit pack.
Note 1: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with two line-side
ports.
Note 2: Figure 9-18 on page 9-40 to Figure 9-23 on page 9-45 show fibers
connected to the line-side and client-side pluggable modules.
Do not seat any type of Muxponder circuit pack into the shelf or connect the
fiber patch cords to the pluggable modules now. For connection procedures,
see the “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
Note 3: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack is equipped with five ports.
Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port, which can also be provisioned
as a client port.
Note 4: Figure 9-20 on page 9-42 and Figure 9-21 on page 9-43 show 10
SFP ports of the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack. Bear in mind that
the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP
modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit
pack and the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER)
circuit pack do support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10
—end—

Figure 9-18
Routing fibers example (two views of front)—MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack (dual-slot)
OM3685.jpg
Note: Route fiber for the MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack as shown in
Figure 9-18.

Figure 9-19
Routing fibers (front view) example—MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack (dual-slot)
OM3349.jpg
Note: Make sure that you cover all unused ports (including BNC ports)
with dust caps.

Figure 9-20
Routing fibers through the shelf through exit aperture (side view)— Muxponder
10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack (dual slot)
OM2617p

Figure 9-21
Routing fibers through the shelf through exit apertures—Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC circuit pack (dual slot)
OM2615p

Figure 9-22
Routing fibers through the shelf through exit apertures—Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack (dual slot)
OM3085p

Figure 9-23
Routing fibers through the shelf through exit apertures (front
view)—Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack (single-slot)
OM3089p

Procedure 9-7
Routing coaxial cables for the Muxponder 20G L2
ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
Follow this procedure to route coaxial cables for a Muxponder 20G L2
ETH+Video Electrical (MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical) circuit pack for
video traffic. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
For details on routing line-side and client-side fiber-optic cables for a MOTR
20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack, see Procedure 9-6 on page 9-29.
Precautions
Make sure that you route the optical fiber cables before you route the coaxial
cables. Perform Procedure 9-6 on page 9-29 before you perform this
procedure.
connect coaxial cables (or fiber) to circuit packs at this time. In this procedure
you route coaxial cables to the circuit pack. (For information on connecting
fiber and coaxial cables to circuit packs, see Connections Procedures,
323-1701-221).
DANGER
—continued—


Routing coaxial cables for the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
maintenance.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, you must make sure that all cables are
labeled (see Procedure 9-1).
Action
Step Action
1 Bear in mind that you

• do not use a shelf cover with a 5200 shelf that is equipped with a MOTR
20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack.
• only route coaxial cables in this procedure. You connect all cables (coax
and fiber) by following procedures in Connection Procedures,
323-1701-221.
• can secure the bundle of coaxial cables to the frame.
• dust caps are required to protect unused/unconnected BNC connector
ports.
Figure 9-24 is for reference only to show the coaxial cables connected.
—continued—


Routing coaxial cables for the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
Step Action
2 Route the coaxial cables to the circuit pack in the shelf.

3 Segregate the coaxial cables from the fiber-optic cables and
• route the bundle down along the front of the faceplate and contain with a
cable tie through the exit apertures above the fiber trough, or
• if the circuit pack is equipped in slot 1 and 2, you can organize the bundle
as shown in Figure 9-24.
—end—

Figure 9-24
Sample of routing coaxial cables (front view)—MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video
Electrical circuit pack (dual-slot)
OM3350.jpg
Note: Make sure that you cover all unused ports (including BNC ports)
with dust caps.

Procedure 9-8
Routing fibers for an OTR 10G Quad or OTR 10G Quad
with Encryption
Follow this procedure to route fiber-optic cables for an OTR 10G Quad (QOTR
10G) or OTR 10G Quad with Encryption (QOTR/E 10G) circuit pack. Consult
For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” in Connection

Precautions
connect fibers or cables to circuit packs at this time. In this procedure you
route fibers to the circuit pack. (For information on connecting fiber to circuit
packs, see Connections Procedures, 323-1701-221.)
DANGER
DANGER
—continued—


Routing fibers for an OTR 10G Quad or OTR 10G Quad with Encryption
CAUTION
CAUTION
maintenance.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, you must make sure that
connectors”)
—continued—


Table 9-13
Tools and materials required to route fibers for the QOTR 10G or QOTR/E 10G
circuit pack
Line side: Single-mode fiber (SMF) duplex up to 4 duplex patch no

SC/PC-LC/PC cable with a straight boot on the cords for each (order from
SC connector and a 45-degree boot for the LC circuit pack, Ciena)
connector (see Note). depending on the
configuration
Client side: LC to SC duplex fiber patch cords to 1 duplex patch no (order

connect the circuit pack (LC) to the patch panel cords for each XFP from Ciena)
or subtending equipment (SC) and a 45-degree port used
Multimode fiber (MMF) required for 850 nm
client interfaces (NT0H39AA or NT0H4319).
Single-mode fiber (SMF) or multimode fiber
(MMF) required for 1310 nm client interfaces
(NT0H39AB or NT0H4320).
client interfaces (NT0H4381 or NT0H4382).
and fixed DWDM 1528.77 nm to 1564.88 nm
(NT0H4381 or NT0H4382)
Note 1: QOTR 10G circuit packs are autoprovisioned with two line-side ports (Port
1 and Port 2) and two client-side ports (Port 3 and Port 4). You can provision Port 3
and Port 4 as line-side ports for pass-through (regenerator) configurations.
Note 2: Refer to “Fiber-optic patch cords” in Network Planning and Link
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route fiber.

• Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged
• Route all fibers entering the shelf on the left side to the circuit packs in
• Route all fibers entering the shelf on the right side to the circuit packs in
the fiber management trough located just below the circuit packs (see Figure
9-25).
Figure 9-25
OM3780
RS232/V24 1 (DTE) RS232/V24 2 (DCE)
Maintenance panel
1
1
14
CRITICAL
POWER A POWER B
MAJOR
9
MINOR
ON ON
DATA
25
13
ESD
10BASE-T 1X
OFF OFF ACO LINK
DATA
ACO
LINK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fiber raceway
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Fiber raceway
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
CLEI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fiber management
trough
FAN
Cooling unit
STATUS
WEST OMX EAST OMX

OMX tray
BAND LOS BAND LOS
—continued—


Step Action
3 Route the duplex LC-SC optical patch cords (for line side and client side, as
applicable) through the vertical fiber brackets of the shelf, and through the
fiber management trough of the 5200 shelf.
• Route the fiber from the left side of the shelf through the vertical fiber
brackets on the left side of the shelf, then into the fiber management
trough.
• Route the fiber from the right side of the shelf through the vertical fiber
brackets on the right side of the shelf, then into the fiber management
trough.
4 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fiber exiting or entering the
shelf to the side of the shelf.
Routing fibers between the shelf fiber management trough and the XFP ports (line and client) on
the circuit pack
5 Bear in mind that the QOTR 10G and QOTR/E 10G circuit packs are
equipped with two line-side ports (Ports 1 and 2) and two client-side ports
(Ports 3 and 4). Ports 3 and 4 are client ports, which can also be provisioned
as a line ports. For details, see Network Planning and Link Engineering,
323-1701-110.
6 Manage fibers correctly. Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route
fiber:
Fiber slack can facilitate future disconnection of fiber from a single XFP
port.
• Achieve the correct bend radius when you are routing fibers. Make sure
that the fibers in the fiber bundle are as close as possible to the shelf front
cover.
• Rotate slightly the 45-degree boot on the line-side fiber LC connector for
Ports 1 and 2 so that the duplex LC fibers are oriented on the left of the
circuit pack faceplate.
• Segregate the line-side fiber on the uppermost position of the faceplate
in Ports 1 and 2 from the Ports 3 and 4 fibers.
shelf front cover.
—continued—


Step Action
• Do not seat any type of circuit pack into the shelf or connect the fiber
patch cords to the pluggable modules now. For connection procedures,
see the “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures,
323-1701-221.
7 Route the duplex fibers from the fiber management trough of the shelf to the
XFP port on the QOTR 10G or QOTR/E 10G circuit pack as follows.
• for Ports 1 and 2 up through the left exit aperture of the fiber trough under
the circuit pack
• for Ports 3 and 4 up through the right exit aperture of the fiber trough
under the circuit pack. Bear in mind that Ports 3 and 4 can be
reconfigured as line ports.
Note: Figure 9-26 on page 9-56 shows fibers connected to the line-side and
client-side pluggable modules, as applicable.
Do not seat any type of QOTR 10G circuit pack into the shelf or connect the
fiber patch cords to the pluggable modules now. For connection procedures,
see the “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
—end—

Figure 9-26
Routing fibers to an OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack
OM3610.jpg

Procedure 9-9
Routing fibers from the OMX (Standard) tray
Follow this procedure to route the fiber-optic pigtails from the OMX (Standard)
tray through the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your
system diagram for site-specific details.
Precautions
DANGER
Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when
you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber.
Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in.
Requirements
Table 9-14 lists the tools and materials that you require to complete this
procedure.
Table 9-14
Tools and materials required
No. 2 Phillips screwdriver 1 no
connectors”)
• Make sure all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 9-1)
—continued—


When you complete this procedure the fiber-optic pigtails are routed from the
OMX (Standard) tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see
the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures,
323-1701-221.
Action
Step Action
1 Remove the cover of the fan.

2 Disconnect the OMX maintenance cable.
3 Open the OMX (Standard) tray by pressing and holding the two locking
latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open. See
Figure 9-31 on page 9-62.
4 Remove the cover of the west OMX by removing the four screws that keep
the cover in position and lifting the cover to the side. See Figure 9-27 on page
9-60.
5 Remove the caps from the top of the flexible fiber guide attached to the west
OMX and move the tabs out of the way. Extend the fiber guide.
6 Verify that the laser radiation tag is attached to the OMX pigtails. The laser
radiation tag is included with the 5200 installation kit.
Note: If the laser radiation tags are not attached to the OMX pigtails, refer to
Procedure 4-20 “Installing an OMX (Standard) tray” on page 4-112 (step 5).
CAUTION
Make sure that you do not disturb the optical fibers in
the OMX when you route the pigtails. Incorrect
handling can result in damage to the optical fibers.
7 Route the OMX pigtails from the west OMX through the opening on the left
side of the tray and through the flexible fiber guide. See Figure 9-28 on page
9-60.
Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be
damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when
you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is
8 Replace the caps on the flexible fiber guides at each end and on every third
link.
9 Insert the end of the flexible fiber guide attached to the west OMX into place
on the left side of the shelf. See Figure 9-29 on page 9-61.
—continued—


Step Action
10 Route the pigtails from the flexible fiber guide up through the vertical fiber
brackets and into the fiber management trough below the card cage area.
11 Replace the west OMX cover, making sure that the pigtails come out of the
opening in the cover that is closest to the rack rail. (The cover only fits one
way. If necessary, turn the cover 180° .) Make sure that the back edge of the
cover fits into the slot at the back of the tray. See Figure 9-30 on page 9-61.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the optical fibers, make sure that
the optical fibers inside the OMX are clear of the cover
when you replace the cover.
12 Repeat steps step 3 through step 11 for the east OMX and the opening on the
right side of the tray.
13 Slide in the drawer while pressing the locking tabs in the middle of the sides
of the drawer (see Figure 9-31 on page 9-62).
The front locking tabs click when the tray is in the correct position.
14 Reconnect the OMX maintenance cable.
exiting the shelf.
16 Replace the fan cover.
—end—

Figure 9-27
Removing the cover of an OMX (Standard) tray
OM0121p
Figure 9-28
Flexible fiber guide position
OM0128p

Figure 9-29
Routing the OMX (Standard) fiber-optic pigtails
OM0123p
Figure 9-30
Replacing the cover of an OMX (Standard) tray
OM0122p

Figure 9-31
Locking tabs on the OMX (Standard) drawer
OM0129p

Procedure 9-10
Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM
Follow this procedure to route optical fiber patch cords within the OMX 1CH
CWDM.
Requirements
Complete the procedures to mount a 5100 shelf and the OMX 1CH CWDM
drawer in a rack before you begin this procedure.
See “CWDM OMX” on page 16-16 in the “OMX modules” chapter of Hardware
Description, 323-1701-102, for a complete description of the OMX 1CH
CWDM.
Use SC-FC patch cords (NT0H4346) to make OMX-OCLD connections. Use

SC-SC patch cords (NT0H4330) to connect east and west OMX modules at a
site with one OMX where cross-over connections are required.
ATTENTION
Optical patch cords that connect to circuit packs must be routed through the
right-hand side of the OMX 1CH CWDM drawer.
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
Make sure that all connectors are adequately cleaned before
you make the connections described in this procedure.
—continued—


CAUTION
Clean connectors to avoid system degradation
When connecting fibers and components, clean every
connector inside and outside each circuit pack and module to
avoid system degradation.
CAUTION
Observe minimum bend radius
optical fiber.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging fiber optic patch cords, ensure that you
push individual bulkhead connector devices back into place
before you close the OMX 1CH CWDM drawer.
CAUTION
Label all patch cords clearly
band and function (Add or Drop) information.
Action
Step Action
Routing patch cords for OCLD connections

1 See Procedure 1-3, “Accessing connectors in an OMX 1CH CWDM” in
Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221 for information on accessing the
drawer and the bulkhead connectors.
2 In the east or west OMX module, remove the dust caps from the Band
Add/Band Drop connectors. Remove the dust caps from the patch cords that
you intend to connect.
3 Insert the SC connector of an SC/FC patch cord into the Band Add connector
in the top part of the Band Add/Band Drop connector unit. Insert the SC
connector of another SC/FC patch cord into the Band Drop connector in the
bottom part of the unit. See Figure 9-33 on page 9-66.
—continued—


Step Action
4 Route the patch cords to the right, as shown in Figure 9-32 on page 9-65. Use
curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the drawer.
5 Repeat step 2 through step 4 for the OMX Band Add/Band Drop connector
unit in the opposite direction, if required. See Figure 9-32 for fiber routing.
Patch cord routing for OCLD connections is complete. If you require optical
passthrough at the site with one OMX drawer, go to step 6.
Routing patch cords for cross-over connections between east and west at a site with one OMX
6 For optical passthrough, use two SC-SC patch cords and connect one end of
each cable to the THRU IN/THRU OUT connector unit in the west OMX. See
Figure 9-33 to view the connector labels.
7 Route the fiber to the east OMX, as shown in Figure 9-35 on page 9-67.
8 Connect the patch cord originating at the west THRU IN to the east THRU
OUT. Connect the patch cord originating at the west THRU OUT to the east
THRU IN. See Figure 9-34 on page 9-67 to view the required connections.
Cross-over connections are complete.
—end—
Figure 9-32
OCLD patch cord routing in a OMX 1CH CWDM
OM1065p

Figure 9-33
Connector labels in a OMX 1CH CWDM
OM0898t
Rear (External connections)

B
O OTS
T OU THR
T U
T OU BAN
O T
OTS DRO D B
P IN THR P O
U T
IN BAN
D T
ADD
O
P
OTS
IN THR
U
IN BAN
OTS D T
ADD
OU THR O
T U
OU P
T BAN
DRO D B
P O
T
Front (Filter connections)

Figure 9-34
East and west cross-over connections
OM1063p
WEST OMX EAST OMX
OTS THRU BAND OTS THRU BAND

OUT OUT DROP OUT OUT DROP
OTS THRU BAND OTS THRU BAND

IN IN ADD IN IN ADD
From east Tx To east Rx From west Tx To west Rx
Figure 9-35
Cross-over connections in a OMX 1CH CWDM
OM0968p

Procedure 9-11
Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or
OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the OMX 4CH + Fiber
Manager, OMX 4CH Enhanced tray, or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz through
the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system
diagram for site-specific details.
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
fibers attached to the connector unit, or both.
is opened.
—continued—


Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM
100 GHz
Requirements
• The OMX cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the OMX
4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH Enhanced tray, or OMX 4CH DWDM 100
GHz to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting
components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
Action
Step Action
1 Open the tray by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the
equipment drawer and pull the equipment drawer toward you until it is fully
open.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling can result in damage to the optical
fibers.
2 Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is
located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer.
If the equipment drawer has a Then
beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by
locking clip rotating the beige non-spring-loaded
locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 9-38
on page 9-72) until it rests on the edge of
the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3.
red spring-loaded locking clip no action is required.
or no locking clip Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip
(Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically
clicks into place to keep the equipment
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


100 GHz
Step Action
3 If this OMX connects to circuit packs in slots 1-8, route the fibers entering or
exiting the tray through the opening on the left side (see Figure 9-36 on page
9-71). If this OMX connects to circuit packs in slots 11-18, route the fibers
entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right side (see Figure
9-37 on page 9-72). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be
Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray.
Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks
or Velcro cable ties..
4 Repeat step 1 and step 3 for the other OMX (if applicable).
exiting the shelf.
6
CAUTION
Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered
and snapped into place before closing any equipment
drawers. Failure to do so can cause damage to the
connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector
unit, or both.
Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 in. (30 mm)

for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management
components in the equipment drawer to route the fiber.
Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and

exiting the equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not
left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged
when the equipment drawer is opened.
—continued—


100 GHz
Step Action
7 If the equipment drawer has a Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip return the beige non-spring-loaded
locking clip to the original upright
position
red spring-loaded locking clip push the red spring-loaded locking
clip down
8 Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct
position.
—end—
Figure 9-36
OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM
100 GHz optical fiber routing (left side)
OM0515p
B
O
T DROP OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP
BAND TX
CH 1 DROP
CH 1 ADD
CH 2 DROP
CH 2 ADD
CH 3 DROP
CH 3 ADD
CH 4 DROP
CH 4 ADD
BAND RX
T
O
P ADD IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
T
O
P TX IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
B
O
T RX OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP
CAUTION

Figure 9-37
OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM
100 GHz optical fiber routing (right side)
OM2911t
Figure 9-38
Locking a non-spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample)
OM2883t
Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a beige non-spring-loaded locking

clip, you must lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige
non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise until it rests on the edge
of the equipment drawer.
Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must return the
beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position.

Figure 9-39
Unlocking a spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample)
OM2825t
Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a red spring-loaded locking clip, no

action is required when you open the equipment drawer. The red
spring-loaded locking clip (Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks
into place to keep the equipment drawer open.
Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must push the red
spring-loaded locking clip down.

Procedure 9-12
Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 16CH DWDM
(NT0H32JA or NT0H32KA) or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JB or
NT0H32JC). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Use this procedure only for fiber routing, not for connecting modules. For more
information on connection procedures, refer to Connection Procedures,
323-1701-221.
Note: No fiber slack storage devices are provided inside the OMX 16CH
DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. You must manage fiber slack
outside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. The steps
in this procedure provide guidelines on fiber management. Make sure that
you confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management for the
system with the person responsible for installation.
Precautions
If you are using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure
the split flex tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse
arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.
DANGER
—continued—


Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz
CAUTION
Make sure that the slider adapters (holding the fiber
connectors) are completely inserted back into place before
closing the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel. Failure to do so can
cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the
connector unit, or both.
patch cords. Always follow the fiber routing guidelines within
this procedure.
Requirements
Before you start this procedure, make sure that
• the OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA or NT0H32KA) or OMX 16CH DWDM
100 GHz (NT0H32JB or NT0H32JC) is installed. For installation
information, see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.
• all fibers and connectors are clean
• all fibers are labeled
• you find out the strategy for fiber slack management for the system from
your next level of support (for installation)
Table 9-15 lists the tools and materials required to route the OMX 16CH
DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz fibers.
Table 9-15
Tools and materials for routing fibers in the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz
#2 Phillips screwdriver 1 no
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left
and right) of the front panel of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM
100 GHz. Then pull down the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100
GHz front panel. See Figure 9-40 for an view of the top right lock screw (front
panel closed
Note: The internal fibers are already routed inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or
OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz drawer.
2 For the routing of external fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz, follow the inter-shelf routing fiber diagram inside the OMX
16CH DWDM front panel (see Figure 9-41) or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz
front panel. For external and internal fiber routing in the OMX 16CH DWDM,
see Figure 9-42. (External and internal fiber routing for the OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz is similar to that shown in Figure 9-42.) For external fibers,
follow the guidelines shown on the inter-shelf routing fiber label as follows:
• Slider adapters on the left side: Route to the left side of the drawer the
duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for
— Band 1 and Band 2 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA),
and
— Band 5 and Band 6 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA)
— Band 1 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JBE5)
— Band 3 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JCE5)
• Slider adapters in the center: Route to the right side of the drawer
— the SC fibers going to the OTS slider adapters for both the C-band,
the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM, and Band 1 and 2 and Band 3 and 4
OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz
— the L-band slider adapters on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM.
(These ports are the L-band upgrade ports only available on the
NT0H32JA.)
— the SC fibers going to the THRU slider adapters for Band 1 and 2 and
Band 3 and 4 OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz
—continued—


Step Action
• Slider adapters on the right side: Route to the right side of the drawer the
duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for
— Band 3 and Band 4 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA),
and
— Band 7 and Band 8 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA)
— Band 2 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JBE5)
— Band 4 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JCE5)
Note: Figure 9-42 shows the external fibers connected in the OMX 16CH
DWDM. For more information on connection procedures, refer to
Then go to step 3.
3 Make sure that the fibers enter and exit the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz through the apertures on the side of the drawer. See Figure
9-40 for a view of the fibers entering and exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM or
OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (front panel closed).
Note 1: Store fiber slack outside the OMX 16CH DWDM or the OMX 16CH
DWDM 100 GHz, using alternative methods. For example, tie fiber bundles
(fastened with curly locks or Velcro cable ties) on the side of the rack. Make
sure that you confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management with
the person responsible for installation.
exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. See Figure
9-40 and Figure 9-42.
5 Pull up the front panel and secure the two external lock-screws to close the
OMX 16CH DWDM or the OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz.
—end—

Figure 9-40
Lock screw on the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel
(front panel closed)
OM2613p
Figure 9-41
Inter-shelf fiber routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM front cover
OM2626p
Note: The inter-shelf fiber routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM 100
GHz front cover is similar to the one shown in Figure 9-41.

Figure 9-42
Routing of fibers inside the OMX 16CH DWDM
OM2627p
Note: The inter-shelf fiber routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM 100
GHz front cover is similar to the one shown in Figure 9-42.

Procedure 9-13
Routing fibers for the ECT tray
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the ECT tray through the
fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram
for site-specific details.
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
the drawer to route the fiber.
drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become
stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened.
Requirements
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the ECT
tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Remove the cover of the fan.

2 Disconnect the ECT maintenance cable.
3 Open the ECT tray by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the
drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open.
4 Loosen the captive screws that secure the access door on the top left side of
the ECT and open the door.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling can result in damage to the optical
fibers.
5 Remove the caps from the top of the flexible fiber guide attached to the ECT
tray and move the tabs out of the way. Extend the fiber guide.
6 Route the fibers through the flexible fiber guide into the ECT tray through the
opening on the left hand side of the tray (see Figure 9-43). Consult your
or Velcro cable ties.
7 Replace the caps on the flexible fiber guides at each end and on every third
link.
8 To route fibers to the circuit packs, follow Procedure 9-5.
9 Close the ECT cover and tighten the captive screws.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the optical fibers, make sure that
the optical fibers inside the ECT tray are clear of the
cover when you replace the cover.
—continued—


Step Action
10 Repeat step 3 through step 7 for the other ECT tray (if applicable).
11 Slide the ECT tray into the shelf while pressing the locking tabs in the middle
of the sides of the drawer.
12 Reconnect the ECT maintenance cable.
exiting the shelf.
14 Replace the fan cover.
Figure 9-43
ECT routing
OM0121p
—end—

Procedure 9-14
Routing fibers for the OSC tray
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the OSC tray through the
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
is opened.
—continued—


Requirements
• Make sure the OSC tray (NT0H57FA, or NT0H57DA) is installed. For
installation information, see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.
• Make sure the OSC module(s) is installed. For installation information, see
Procedure 4-27 on page 4-176.
• The OSC cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed.
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the OSC
tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting
Action
Step Action
1 Open the OSC tray by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the
open.
If the equipment drawer Then
has a
beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating
locking clip the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip
counter-clockwise (Figure 9-38 on page
9-72) until it rests on the edge of the
equipment drawer. Then go to step 3.
red spring-loaded locking no action is required.
clip or no locking clip Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
3 Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right
side according to Figure 9-44. Consult your system diagram for site-specific
details.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-44
OSC tray
OM0726p
B B
O WSC O WSC
T To RX OSC T To RX OSC
DROP THRU DROP THRU
T T OTS
O WSC OUT OTS B O WSC OUT B
P FmTX OSC OUT O P FmTX OSC OUT O
ADD THRU T ADD THRU T
IN OTS T IN OTS T
IN O IN O
P P
T T
O WSC O WSC
P To RX OSC P To RX OSC
ADD C/L BA ADD C/L BA
B ND B ND
WSC IN COMM WSC IN COMM
O ON T O ON T
T FmTX OSC IN O T FmTX OSC IN O
DROP C/L BA P DROP C/L BA P
ND ND
OUT COMM OUT COMM
ON BT ON B
OUT O OUT O
TP T
Power monitor taps Power monitor taps
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

Do Not Stare Into Beam Or View
Directly With Optical Instruments
Class 3A Laser Product
MAXIMUM OUTPUT POWER: 50mW
WAVELENGTH: 1550nm
EN80825-1 and 2: 1994

Procedure 9-15
Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the OSC splitter/coupler
tray with dual taps through the fiber management trough below the card cage.
Precautions
When installing the 5200 shelves and equipment into a new or existing rack,
If you are using split flex tubing to route and secure optical fiber cables, secure
the split flex tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse
arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.
DANGER
CAUTION
is opened.
—continued—


Requirements
• the equipment drawer for the OSC splitter/coupler tray assembly with dual
taps (NT0H57GB, NT0H57GC) is installed. For installation information,
see Procedure 4-27 on page 4-176.
• the OSC splitter/coupler module(s) with dual taps are installed in the
equipment drawer (NT0H57GA). For installation information, see
• the data communication cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed
connectors”)
When you complete this procedure, the optical fibers are routed from the OSC
splitter/coupler tray with dual taps to the circuit pack cage. For connection
procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection
Action
Step Action
1 Open the equipment drawer of the OSC with dual taps by pressing and
holding the two locking latches on the equipment drawer and pull the
equipment drawer toward you until it is fully open.
has a
beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the
locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip
counter-clockwise (Figure 9-38 on page 9-72)
until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer.
Then go to step 3.
red spring-loaded no action is required.
locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip (Figure
clip
9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks into place
to keep the equipment drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
3 Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right
side (see Figure 9-45). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. If the bend radius limiters in
the front left of the tray are used to route the excess fiber, make sure that the
monitoring fibers going to the taps on the faceplate are not buried under the
external fibers that are connected to the tray. Quick and easy access is
required for back-side fiber cleaning. To ensure adequate access, you must
disconnect the monitoring fibers, cap them with dust caps, route the excess
fiber coming from and outside the tray. Then you must uncap the monitoring
fibers, clean them, and reconnect them to the internal monitoring ports of the
faceplate.
Note 3: If you view the equipment drawer from the top, you can see that the
fibers exit the right side and route internally. In Figure 9-45, although not
shown, the fibers are routed inside the equipment drawer at the rear.
Note 5: To route fibers to the circuit packs, follow Procedure 9-5.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-45
Equipment drawer with two OSC splitter/coupler trays with dual taps
OM2671p

Procedure 9-16
Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot
(for Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, only)
Use this procedure to install a 90-degree bootclip to the boot of a patch cord
to be routed to a Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10),
NT0H59AC.
At the TPT-10 end, Ciena recommends patch cords with LC pigtails. At the
other end (which you attach to the circuit pack), Ciena recommends patch
cords with LC 45-degree 1.6 mm pigtails. For ordering information, see
NTT862HB in “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network
Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110, Part 3.
Requirements
Make sure that you have one 90-degree bootclip for each fiber that you are
routing to the TPT-10. The TPT-10 is shipped with 20 bootclips. If you are
routing more than 20 fibers to and from the TPT-10, you can order extra
bootclips separately. For ordering information, see NTT862HB in
“565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and
Link Engineering, 323-1701-110, Part 3.
Procedure steps
Step Action
1 Install a bootclip onto the fiber in front of the LC boot.

2 Slide the bootclip onto the LC boot until securely seated (see Figure 9-46).
You have completed this procedure. Continue with Procedure 9-17 on page
9-93.
—end—

Figure 9-46
Install bootclip up against white sleeve
OM3891.jpg

Procedure 9-17
Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray
ATTENTION
Make sure that you perform Procedure 9-16 on page 9-91 before you route
fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10), NT0H59AC.
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the Transponder
Protection Tray (NT0H59AA, NT0H59AB, NT0H59BA, NT0H59BB, or
NT0H59AC) through the fiber management trough below the card cage.
Precautions
DANGER
—continued—


CAUTION
is opened.
Requirements
• Make sure the Transponder Protection Tray (NT0H59AA, NT0H59AB,
NT0H59BA, NT0H59BB, or NT0H59AC) is installed. For installation
information, see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.
• The Transponder Protection Tray cable (Ethernet cable) has been
installed.
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the
Transponder Protection Tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection
procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection
Action
Step Action
1 Select your first step.

If the Transponder Protection Tray is Then go to
equipped with a
hinged door (NT0H59AC) step 9
—continued—


Step Action
2 Open the Transponder Protection Tray by pressing and holding the two
locking latches on the equipment drawer and pull the equipment drawer
toward you until it is fully open.
has a
until it rests on the edge of the equipment
drawer. Then go to step 4.
locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip
clip
(Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks
Go to step 4.
4 Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left
side according to Figure 9-47 (four-filter Transponder Protection Tray) or
Figure 9-48 (two-filter Transponder Protection Tray). Consult your system
Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray (for two-filter Transponder
Protection Tray only).
exiting the shelf.
—continued—


Step Action

position
clip down

position.
9 Unlock the door (see Figure 9-49 on page 9-99) of the Transponder
Protection Tray 10 channel (TPT-10) by turning the captive screw counter
clockwise to access the ports.
10 Consult your system diagram for site-specific details to route the fibers to the
appropriate ports. For “TPT-10 (NT0H59AC), door open”, Figure 9-49 on
page 9-99.
11 Route the fibers through the left side or right side opening of the TPT-10.
12 Use the fiber clip feature to manage the fibers (see Figure 9-49 on page
9-99).
14 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle optical fiber entering and exiting
the TPT-10.
15 Close the door, making sure that the optical fibers are not pinched.
16 Lock the door by turning the captive screw clockwise.
—end—

Figure 9-47
Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter)
OM0807p
Client-side connectors
1 2 3 4
B B
O
CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT O
T IN Rx 1 Rx 2 IN Rx 1 Rx 2 IN Rx 1 Rx 2 IN Rx 1 Rx 2 T
T T
O
CLIENT Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT CLIENT Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT CLIENT Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT CLIENT Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT O
P OUT Tx 1 Tx 2 OUT Tx 1 Tx 2 OUT Tx 1 Tx 2 OUT Tx 1 Tx 2 P
T COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER T
O O
P COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 P
B B
O
SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER2 SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER2 SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER O
T COMMON 1 COMMON 1 COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 T
1 2 3 4
5200-side connectors

Figure 9-48
Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter)
OM0909p
1 2
B B
O
CLIENT To client Rx To client Rx CLIENT To client Rx To client Rx O
T IN 1 2 IN 1 2 T
T T
O
CLIENT Fm client Tx Fm client Tx CLIENT Fm client Tx Fm client Tx O
P OUT 1 2 OUT 1 2 P
T T
O
COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER O
P COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 P
B B
O SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER O
T COMMON 1 2 COMMON 1 2 T
1 2

Figure 9-49
TPT-10 (NT0H59AC), door open
OM3331.jpg+OM3329.jpg
Route fiber from ports, through fiber clips, to left or right (as applicable), and out through
opening on left and right side.

Procedure 9-18
Routing fibers for the patch panel
Follow this procedure to route optical fibers within the patch panel for fibers
that connect to OCI SRM, OCI SRM SONET SDH, OCI SRM ESCON,
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16,
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH, Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video, or a Muxponder
20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack, or for fibers that come from the
subtending equipment. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Two types of patch panels are available: the 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA)
and the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB).
• You must use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) for MOTR 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC VCAT client-side applications. The MOTR 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC
VCAT circuit packs supports 20 client signals (10 ports each of Tx and
Rx).
• You can use a 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA) or 20-port patch panel
(NT0H43CB) for a MOTR 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack or a MOTR 20 Gbit/s
ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack.
• You can use a 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA) or 20-port patch panel
(NT0H43CB) for the OCI SRM, OCI SRM SONET SDH, OCI SRM
ESCON, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC, or Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN
4xOC48/STM16 circuit packs.
• The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client
ports (24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port patch panel or one
20-port patch panel to accommodate the 24 clients.
• The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional
Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients), for a total of
16 clients. You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16
clients.
• The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides
4 bidirectional client ports (8 fiber optical clients). You can use either one
16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 8 fiber optical
clients. (The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack
provides another 8 ports, which are used for coaxial cables. The coaxial
cables are managed on the rack uprights.)
—continued—


Precautions
flex tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the equipment rack rails
with lacing cord or wax string.
DANGER
CAUTION
is opened.
Requirements
• Make sure the 16-port patch panel (NT0H343CA) or 20-port patch panel
(NT0H43CB) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-21
on page 4-121.
• Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean.
• Make sure all fibers are labeled.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Open the patch panel by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the
open.
has a
clip (Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks
Go to step 3.
3 Route the patch cords (MT-RJ to SC or MTP to SC) that connect to the circuit
packs seated in the east plane through the right side of the equipment drawer
(see Figure 9-50 on page 9-105 and Figure 9-53 on page 9-109).
Note 1: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table
9-16 on page 9-104. For a list of circuit packs that use the 20-port patch
panel, see Table 9-17 on page 9-107. Consult your system diagram for
—continued—


Step Action
4 Route the patch cords that connect to the circuit packs seated in the west
plane through the left side of the equipment drawer (see Figure 9-51 on page
9-106 and Figure 9-54 on page 9-109). Consult your system diagram for
Note 1: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table
5 Route the subtending optical fibers through the left side of the equipment
drawer (see Figure 9-52 on page 9-107 and Figure 9-55 on page 9-110).
Note: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-50 on page 9-105, Figure 9-51 on page 9-106, and Figure 9-52 on
page 9-107 show an example of a fully fibered 16-port patch panel for the
OCR SRM ESCON or the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit packs. For a
list of other circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel and which specific
ports they use, see Table 9-16.
Table 9-16
Circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA)
Circuit pack Ports 1-4 or 5-8 Ports 1-8
OCI SRM Yes
OCI SRM SONET/SDH Yes
OCI SRM ESCON – Yes
Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s Yes –
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC – Yes
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN Yes –

4xOC48/STM16
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH – Yes
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video – Yes

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Yes –
Electrical
Note: You can use either the 16-port patch panel or the 20-port patch
panel with the circuit packs listed in this table, bearing in mind the
following details related to the Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client
ports (24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port or one 20-port
patch panel to accommodate the 24 clients.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional
Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients), for a total of
16 clients. You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16
clients.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides
4 bidirectional client ports (8 fiber optical clients). You can use either
one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 8 fiber
optical clients. (The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit
pack provides another 8 ports, which are used for coaxial cables. The
coaxial cables are managed on the rack uprights.)

Figure 9-50
Routing patch cords from east circuit packs (in the 16-port patch panel)
OM3815
B
C To RX O
I T
E
N T
A
Fm TX O
P
T
To RX O
C P
P
E B
Fm TX O
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: Labels may not appear as shown.

Figure 9-51
Routing patch cords from west circuit packs (in the 16-port patch panel)
OM3816
B
C To RX O
I T
E
N T
A
Fm TX O
P
T
To RX O
C P
P
E B
Fm TX O
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 9-52
Routing subtending optical fibers (in the 16-port patch panel)
OM3817
B
C To RX O
I T
E
N T
A Fm TX O
P
T
To RX O
C P
P
E B
Fm TX O
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: Figure 9-53 on page 9-109, Figure 9-54 on page 9-109, and Figure
9-55 on page 9-110 show an example of a fully fibered 20-port patch panel
for the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack. For a list of other
circuit packs that can use the 20-port patch panel and which specific ports
they use, see Table 9-17.
Table 9-17
Circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB)
Circuit pack Ports 1-4 or 5-8 Ports 1-8 Ports 1-10

OCI SRM Yes – –
OCI SRM SONET/SDH Yes – –
OCI SRM ESCON – Yes –
Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s Yes – –
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC – Yes –
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC – – Yes

VCAT


Circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB)
Circuit pack Ports 1-4 or 5-8 Ports 1-8 Ports 1-10
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN Yes – –

4xOC48/STM16
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH – – Yes
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video – – Yes
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Yes – –

Electrical
Note: You must use the 20-port patch panel with the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s
GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack, bearing in mind the following details related to the
Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs.
For the rest of the circuit packs listed in this table, you can use either the 16-port
patch panel or the 20-port patch panel with the circuit packs listed in this table,
bearing in mind the following details related to the Muxponder 20G L2 circuit
packs.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client ports
(24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to
accommodate the 24 clients.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional
Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients), for a total of 16 clients.
You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16 clients.
The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides
4 bidirectional client ports (8 fiber optical clients). You can use either one 16-port
or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 8 fiber optical clients. (The
Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides another 8 ports,
which are used for coaxial cables. The coaxial cables are managed on the rack
uprights.)

Figure 9-53
Routing patch cords from east circuit pack (in a 20-port patch panel)
OM2833p
Figure 9-54
Routing patch cords from west circuit packs (in a 20-port patch panel)
OM2834p

Figure 9-55
Routing subtending optical fibers (in a 20-port patch panel)
OM2882p

Procedure 9-19
Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or the OMX
4CH CWDM with dual taps
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 4CH CWDM
(NT0H33JA/KA) or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (NT0H33JB/KB). Consult
Note: The term “OMX 4CH CWDM” may not be used as a label on the
front of the tray. The tray can be shipped with the label “OMX 4 CH 800
GHz <Band/Direction>”, where <Band/Direction> is “C-Band East”,
“C-Band West”, “L-Band East”, or “L-Band West”.
Precautions
DANGER
—continued—


Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps
CAUTION
is opened.
Requirements
• Make sure the OMX 4CH CWDM (NT0H33JA or NT0H33KA) is installed.
For installation information, see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.
Action
Step Action
1 Open the OMX drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the
—continued—


Step Action
located in the back left corner of the drawer.
has a
clip (Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks
Go to step 3.
3 Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the
west plane from the left side of the west OMX drawer. See Figure 9-60 on
page 9-119. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
4 Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the
east plane from right side of the east OMX drawer. See Figure 9-61 on page
9-119. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
—continued—


Step Action
5 Route optical fibers intended for backbone or cross-over connections through

the left or right side of the OMX drawer. See Figure 9-60 on page 9-119 and
Figure 9-61 on page 9-119. Consult your system diagram for site-specific
details.
Note: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from the
left, because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 9-56 on page
9-115 or Figure 9-58 on page 9-117, and Figure 9-57 on page 9-116 or Figure
9-59 on page 9-118.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-56
Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM (C-band)
OM0899t
Rear (Filter connections)
B B
O
OTS THRU BAND 1 BAND 2 BAND 3 BAND 4 O
T OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP T
T T
O
P IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD P
T
T
O
B B
O
Front (External connections)

Figure 9-57
Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM (L-band)
OM0900t
B B
O
T T
O
T T
O OTS THRU BAND 5 BAND 6 BAND 7 BAND 8 O
B
O
OTS THRU BAND 5 BAND 6 BAND 7 BAND 8 B
O

Figure 9-58
Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (C-band)
OM2819t
B B
O
T T
O
T
T
O
B B
O
OTS IN OTS OUT
MONITOR MONITOR
Faceplate OTS IN
MONITOR
OTS OUT
MONITOR

Figure 9-59
Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (L-band)
OM2818t
B B
O
T T
O
T T
O
B
O
OTS THRU BAND 5 BAND 6 BAND 7 BAND 8 B
O
OTS IN OTS OUT
MONITOR MONITOR
Faceplate OTS IN
MONITOR
OTS OUT
MONITOR

Figure 9-60
Patch cord routing from the left (OMX 4CH CWDM)
OM0995p
B B
O
T T
O
T
T OTS THRU BAND 1 BAND 2 BAND 3 BAND 4 O
O
B B
O
CAUTION
Note: The patch cord routing for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps is
the same as shown in Figure 9-60.
Figure 9-61
Patch cord routing from the right (OMX 4CH CWDM)
OM0996p
B B
O
T T
O
T
T OTS THRU BAND 1 BAND 2 BAND 3 BAND 4 O
O
B B
O
CAUTION
Note: The patch cord routing for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps is
the same as shown in Figure 9-61.

Procedure 9-20
Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX
8CH ITU CWDM
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers
• within the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33AA) or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM
(NT0H33BA) or
• to the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) or the OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM (NTPM35BA)
Precautions
If using split flex tubing to route and secure optical fibers, secure the split flex
tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the
DANGER
—continued—


Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM
CAUTION
snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do
so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached
to the connector unit, or both.
Requirements
• Make sure the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33AA), OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM (NT0H33BA), OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB), or OMX
8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA) is installed. For installation information,
see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.
Action
Step Action
1 Select your first step.

If the OMX is equipped with a Then go to
hinged door step 10
—continued—


Step Action
If the equipment Then
drawer has a
beige lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige
non-spring-loaded non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise
locking clip (Figure 9-38 on page 9-72) until it rests on the edge of
the equipment drawer. Then go to step 4.
locking clip or no Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip (Figure 9-39
locking clip on page 9-73) automatically clicks into place to keep
the equipment drawer open.
Go to step 4.
4 Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the west
plane from the left side of the west OMX drawer. See Figure 9-64 on page
9-127 (OMX 4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 9-65 on page 9-127 (OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
5 Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the east
plane from right side of the east OMX drawer. See Figure 9-64 on page 9-127
(OMX 4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 9-65 on page 9-127 (OMX 8CH ITU
CWDM). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
—continued—


Step Action

the left or right side of the OMX drawer. See Figure 9-64 on page 9-127 (OMX
4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 9-65 on page 9-127 (OMX 8CH ITU CWDM).
Note: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from the
left, because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 9-62 on page
9-125, and Figure 9-63 on page 9-126.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
10 Unlock the door (see Figure 9-66 on page 9-128) by turning the captive screw
counter clockwise to access the ports.
11 Consult your system diagram for site-specific details to route the fibers to the
appropriate ports.
• for “Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1471-1531 nm
(NTPM35AA)”, Figure 9-66 on page 9-128
(NTPM35AB)”, Figure 9-67 on page 9-129
(NTPM35BA)”, Figure 9-68 on page 9-130
—continued—


Step Action
12 Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the west
plane from the left side of the OMX.
13 Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the east
plane from the right side of the OMX.
14 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle optical fiber entering and exiting
the OMX.
15 Close the door, making sure that the optical fibers are not pinched.
16 Lock the door by turning the captive screw clockwise.
—end—

Figure 9-62
Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM
OM1956t
Rear fiber connection

(Internal)
B B
O
OTS 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm O
T OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP T
T T
O
OTS 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm O
P IN ADD ADD ADD ADD P
T
T
O
OTS 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm O
P IN ADD ADD ADD ADD P
B B
O
OTS 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm O
T OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP T
Front fiber connection

(External)
Note: For connector labeling for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM
(NTPM35AA/AB), see Figure 9-66 on page 9-128 and Figure 9-67 on
page 9-129.

Figure 9-63
Connector labeling for the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM
OM1957p
Rear fiber connection

(Internal)
B B
O
OTS 1471 nm 1491 nm 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm 1591 nm 1611 nm O
T OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP T
T T
O
P IN ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD P
T
T
O
P IN ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD P
B B
O
T OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP T
Front fiber connection

(External)
Note: For connector labeling for the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA),
see Figure 9-68 on page 9-130.

Figure 9-64
Patch cord routing - OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (left and right side)
OM2138t
Figure 9-65
Patch cord routing - OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (left and right side)
OM2139t

Figure 9-66
Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1471-1531 nm (NTPM35AA)
OM3687.jpg

Figure 9-67
Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1551-1611 nm (NTPM35AB)
OM3688.jpg

Figure 9-68
Patch cord routing on an OMX 8CH ITU CWDM—1471-1611 nm (NTPM35BA)
OM3689.jpg

Procedure 9-21
Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or
the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 1CH OADM
ITU CWDM (NTPM34AA-HA in single tray or dual tray drawer assemblies) or
OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34JA/KA). Consult your system diagram
Precautions
DANGER
The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A.
Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.
CAUTION
—continued—


Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM
Requirements
• Make sure that the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34AA-HA in
single tray or dual tray assembly) or OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM
(NTPM34JA/KA) is installed. For installation information, see
• Make sure that all fibers and connectors are clean.
• Make sure that all fibers are labeled.
Action
Step Action
drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open.
has a
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
3 If you are routing fibers for the Then go to

OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM step 4
OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM step 5
—continued—


Step Action
4 Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to circuit packs located either in the
west or east plane from the right side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in
Figure 9-69 on page 9-135. Route optical SC/FC patch cords intended for
backbone or cross-over connections the same way. Consult your system
Go to step 8.
5 Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to circuit packs located in the west
plane from the left side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 9-70 on
6 Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to circuit packs located in the east
plane from the right side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 9-70 on
—continued—


Step Action

the left or right side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 9-70 on page
9-135. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Note 1: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from
the left, because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 9-71 on
page 9-136 for the front fiber connector locations and names.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-69
Routing fiber for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM
OM2701t
Figure 9-70
Routing fiber for the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (left and right side)
OM2702

Figure 9-71
Front fiber connectors in the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34JA)
OM2700t

Procedure 9-22
Routing fiber for the Optical Trunk Switch
Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch
(OTS).
No fiber management devices are provided on the OTS. However, some

fibering guidelines are provided in this procedure to accommodate the optical
connector orientation on the OTS.
recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fiber.
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
you make any fiber connection.
CAUTION
optical fiber.
CAUTION
Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct information.
—continued—


Routing fiber for the Optical Trunk Switch
Fiber routing guidelines for the OTS

Guideline Detail
1 Route optical fibers to the left of the OTS, since the optical connectors are oriented on the
left.
2 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the OTS.
3 Use the vertical fiber management brackets on the side of the 5200 shelf to route the fibers
to their destination, or use the fiber management devices provided by the customer (split
flex tubing recommended).
—end—

Procedure 9-23
Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch
Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch
(ETS).
No fiber management devices are provided on the ETS. However, some

fibering guidelines are provided in this procedure to accommodate the optical
connector orientation on the ETS.
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
you make any fiber connection.
CAUTION
optical fiber.
CAUTION
Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct information.
—continued—


Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch
Fiber routing guidelines for the ETS

Guideline Detail
1 Route optical fibers to the right of the ETS, since the optical connectors are oriented on the
right.
2 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the ETS shelf area.
3 Use the vertical fiber management brackets on the side of the 5200 shelf to route the fibers
to their destination, or use the fiber management devices provided by the customer (split
flex tubing recommended).
—end—

Procedure 9-24
Routing fibers for the PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the PBE or PBE C-band
100 GHz, and through the PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz to the fiber
management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the PBE
tray or PBE C-band 100 GHz tray, and from the PBE tray or the PBE C-band
100 GHz tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the
“Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
Action
Step Action
1 Open the PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz drawer by pressing and holding the
two locking latches on the equipment drawer and pull the equipment drawer
toward you until it is fully open.
has a
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
3 Route the fibers according to the following diagrams. Consult your system
• left side fiber routing, see Figure 9-72
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-72
PBE or PBE C-band 100 GHz drawer (left side)
OM3053p
Note: Figure 9-72 shows the interior of a C-band 100 GHz PBE tray. The
interior of a PBE tray is similar to the interior of a C-band 100 GHz PBE
tray. The fibering as shown in Figure 9-72 is the same for both the PBE
and the C-band 100 GHz PBE.

Procedure 9-25
Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the 1310 nm
Splitter/Coupler (NT0H57JB), and through the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler to the
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the
1310 nm Splitter/Coupler tray, and from the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler tray to
the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting
Action
Step Action
1 Open the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler drawer by pressing and holding the two
locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully
open.
has a
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
side according to Figure 9-73 on page 9-148. Consult your system diagram
4 Route the fibers within the drawer according to Figure 9-73 on page 9-148.
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-73
1310 nm Splitter/Coupler drawer
OM2127t

Procedure 9-26
Routing fibers for the C&L Splitter/Coupler
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the C&L
Splitter/Coupler (NT0H31AF), and through the C&L Splitter/Coupler to the
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the C&L
Splitter/Coupler tray, and from the C&L Splitter/Coupler tray to the circuit pack
cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter
of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.
Action
Step Action
1 Open the C&L Splitter/Coupler drawer by pressing and holding the two
locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully
open.
has a
drawer open.
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
side according to Figure 9-74 on page 9-152. Consult your system diagram
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-74
C&L Splitter/Coupler drawer
OM1210
B B
O LB O LB
AN AN
T OU D C T OU D C
T BAN T BAN
T
OU D O T
OU D O
O LB T TS B O LB T TS
AND OU AND B
P T O P OU
IN CB IN CB T O
AND T AND T
IN OTS IN OTS
T T
IN O IN O
P P
LB LB
AND AND
IN CB IN CB
AND AND
IN OTS IN OTS
LB T LB T
AN IN AN IN
OU D CB O OU D CB O
T AN T AN
P P
OU D OTS OU D OTS
T B T B
OU OU
T O T O
T T
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

Do Not Stare Into Beam Or View
Directly With Optical Instruments
Class 3A Laser Product
MAXIMUM OUTPUT POWER: 50mW
WAVELENGTH: 1550nm
EN80825-1 and 2: 1994

Procedure 9-27
Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA
Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the Discrete VOA tray
assembly (NT0H31AG), and through the tray assembly to the fiber
management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
connectors”).
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the
Discrete VOA tray, and from the Discrete VOA tray to the circuit pack cage.
For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of
Action
Step Action
1 Open the Discrete VOA drawer by pressing and holding the two locking
latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open.
has a
clip
(Figure 9-39 on page 9-73) automatically clicks
Go to step 3.
—continued—


Step Action
side or the right side, according to Figure 9-75 on page 9-156. Consult your
exiting the shelf.
position
clip down

position.
—end—

Figure 9-75
Discrete VOA drawer
OM2286p

Procedure 9-28
Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer
Follow these guidelines when you are routing fibers in and out of a DSCM
drawer equipped with a DSCM tray. This procedure also provides guidelines
on how to bundle fiber around bend radius limiters inside the DSCM drawer
equipped with a DSCM tray assembly.
The fiber management guidelines for the DSCM drawer are very similar to the
fiber management guidelines for the other 565/5100/5200 drawer assemblies.
Precautions
CAUTION
Make sure that the drawer from which the fiber is being routed
is fully open before you begin to route the fiber around the fiber
bend radius limiters. Allow sufficient slack in the fibers entering
and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, you risk
stretching the fibers when the drawer is opened.
CAUTION
Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber on the fiber bend
radius limiters too tightly. Otherwise you risk damaging the
fiber. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle
fibers entering and exiting a drawer. Always use curly locks or
Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers around the bend radius
limiters inside a drawer equipped with tray assemblies.
CAUTION
Before you make connections, make sure that fiber connectors
are clean. Otherwise, you risk affecting network reliability.
CAUTION
—continued—


Requirements
• the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) is installed. For installation information,
see Procedure 4-21 “Installing and grounding equipment drawers”.
• the DSCM tray is installed in the DSCM drawer. For installation
information, see Procedure 4-26 “Installing a DSCM tray in a DSCM
drawer”.
connectors”)
When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the
DSCM tray inside the DSCM drawer to the side of the 5200 shelf. For
connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of
—continued—



Guideline Detail
1 Make sure that every fiber is labeled.
2 Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the
right or on the left side of the drawer.
3 Route the fibers coming into the drawer from the left side around the
bend radius limiters on the left side of the drawer (see Figure 9-76 on
page 9-160). Route the fibers coming into the drawer from the right side
around the bend radius limiters on both the right and left sides of the
drawer (see Figure 9-77 on page 9-161).
Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged
Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Always use the fiber bend radius
limiters to coil excess fiber slack.
4 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers routed around
the fiber bend radius limiters to avoid loose fibers inside a drawer.
Figure 9-76 on page 9-160 illustrates how to route fibers in the DSCM
drawer coming from/going to the left side opening of the drawer. Figure
9-76 shows how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters on the
left side of a DSCM drawer using Velcro cables ties.
Figure 9-77 on page 9-161 illustrates how to route fibers in the DSCM
drawer coming from/going to the right side opening of the drawer. Figure
9-77 shows how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters on both
the left and right sides of a DSCM drawer using Velcro cables ties.
Note: For clarity, the photos for Figure 9-76 and Figure 9-77 were taken
with the DSCM drawer on a table rather than in the rack. When you route
fiber, the DSCM drawer is installed in the rack.
5 Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and
exiting the drawer. See Figure 9-78 on page 9-162 for an illustration of
how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a drawer using curly locks.
See Figure 9-79 on page 9-162 for an illustration of how to bundle the
fibers exiting and entering a drawer using Velcro cable ties.
—end—

Figure 9-76
Routing fibers in a DSCM drawer, entering and exiting left side of drawer (with
Velcro cable ties)
OM2422p

Figure 9-77
Routing fibers in a DSCM drawer, entering and exiting right side of drawer (with Velcro cable ties)
OM2423p

Figure 9-78
Bundling fibers entering and exiting DSCM drawer (with curly locks)
OM2420p
Curly Locks
Open Closed
Figure 9-79
Bundling fibers entering and exiting a DSCM drawer (with Velcro cable ties)
OM2421p
Velcro cable ties
Closed
Open

10-1
Cleaning connectors 10-

Use the procedures in this chapter to clean connectors. The performance of
an optical fiber connector depends on how clean the connector and coupling
are at the time of connection.
Cleaning zones
Optical connector cleaning zones for routine maintenance procedures include
the ferrule cylinder and end face surfaces.
You only have to clean the circuit pack or coupler adapter housings during the
initial installation, or when you suspect performance is reduced because of
contamination.
Dust and dirt particles can bind to the end-face of the ferrule, especially when
the optical power going through the fiber is high. If you remate dirty connectors
you can damage the end-face. To correct this type of damage you require
special polishing equipment and techniques beyond the scope of routine
maintenance. If you discover a damaged ferrule end-face, contact Ciena.
Figure 10-1 on page 10-2 shows an example of a typical optical fiber

connector and adapter housing. The ferrule provides the physical support for
the optical fiber. The adapter housing is used to connect the two optical fibers
together by aligning the two ferrules.

10-2 Cleaning connectors
Figure 10-1
Typical optical fiber connector and adapter housing
OM0088t
Guide pin
Plug retainer
Ferrule Adapter housing
Requirements
Ciena recommends that you always clean fiber-optic connectors before
connecting to transmission equipment, test equipment, patch panels, or other
connectors.
Connector cleaning:
• ensures that fiber-optic assemblies work at their correct power level, by
removing any dust or particles that can lead to optical power attenuation
• prevents damage to alignment sleeves and adapter housings
Precautions
Make sure that you review these caution and danger warning notices before
you follow any cleaning procedure in this chapter.
DANGER
Do not look into the end of fiber-optic connectors or into
faceplate connectors of installed circuit packs. The light source
used in fiber-optic devices can damage your eyes.

DANGER
Wear safety glasses when you work with the canned
compressed gas to avoid getting dust in your eyes.
Wear safety glasses when working with isopropyl alcohol.

Isopropyl alcohol can cause eye irritation on contact.
To avoid extended inhalation of alcohol vapors, use only small

amounts of alcohol and work in a clean and ventilated area.
To avoid direct skin contact with the isopropyl alcohol and to

avoid contaminating the ferrules with skin oils, it is preferable
to wear vinyl gloves.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Risk of connectors contamination
To reduce the risk of oil contamination on connectors, do not
use commercial compressed air or hose air when cleaning
connectors and receptacles. Always use canned compressed
gas to remove excess dust and dirt.
Do the appropriate cleaning process before remating

connectors with their receptacles.
To prevent contamination, make sure you cover the optical

faceplate connectors of all installed circuit packs and all the
unconnected fiber connector ferrules with dust caps.
To avoid applying any oil from your fingers or other

contaminants to the end face of the ferrule, handle connectors
carefully.
CAUTION
Risk of signal degradation
Do not allow the solvent to dry on the ferrule. Dried solvent
leaves a residual film on ferrule surfaces that prevents the
fiber-optic assembly from working correctly.

Handling optical fibers

When you work with optical fibers, you must take these precautions:
• Handle optical fibers with caution. Place the optical fibers in a safe location
during installation, in order to avoid any fiber bending or anything else that
could damage the fiber.
• Follow the manufacturer instructions when you use an optical test set.
Incorrect calibration or control settings can create hazardous levels of
radiation.
You can use the Universal fiber tool to facilitate the insertion and extraction of
fiber connectors to prepare for the fiber cleaning procedures in this chapter.
The Universal fiber tool is provided with the 5200 NT0H50BB shelf, the
Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack, and the Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack.
Figure 10-2 shows the Universal fiber tool being used to access dual LC fiber
connectors.
Figure 10-2
Disconnecting an LC connector using the Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
OM2647p
Universal
fiber
tool
Barrel
end
Plug
retainer
Ferrule Gripper
end
Guide
pin

Requirements
Table 10-1 lists the tools and materials recommended to complete the
procedures in this chapter.
Table 10-1
Tools and materials required to complete cleaning procedures
Vendor Item Description
TEXWIPE TX404 Absorbond Lint free, fiber free, 100% polyester cloth,
clean-room certified
TEXWIPE TX806 Wipe Pre-moistened alcohol wipes
Chemical Supply Isopropyl Alcohol, Certified particle grade, filtered through

House reagent grade 0.2 (store in a plastic squeeze bottle,
(Chemtronics) available from Chemtronics)
Coventry 48040 Mini Foam Mini foam swab in static-free package

(Chemtronics) swab
Coventry 1.25 mm Sleeve Used to clean 1.25 mm female optical
(Chemtronics) Cleaning swab adaptors
ARIA CLETOP stick-type Dry cloth on a stick

Technologies Inc. (1.25 mm diameter)
NOYES 200X (or higher) Fiber-optic inspection microscope kit,

Fiberscope 200X or higher magnification
AlcoaFL FCC-02 PREP Self-contained optical fiber connector

cleaner, miracreation polyester tape
AlcoaFL ACT-1 Adapter cleaning tips
(multiple vendors) Vinyl gloves
NTT international CLETOP reel type A Optical fiber connector cleaner (on a
wiping roll)
NTT-AT Optical reel cleaner Used to clean male MPO type multifiber
(part number 6226) connectors
NTT-AT Optical reel cleaner Used to clean female MPO type multifiber
(part number 6227) connectors
multiple vendors Optical fiber Each cleaning kit case typically contains
connector cleaning Cletop Reel cleaner, swabs,
kit optic-preparation units, alcohol pump
dispenser, space for compressed air can
multiple vendors Canned used to clean female optical adaptor

compressed air housing


Tools and materials required to complete cleaning procedures
Vendor Item Description
multiple vendors Safety glasses Used to protect eyes when canned

compressed air is used
multiple vendors Antistatic strap For ESD protection when manipulating
electronic components
multiple vendors Fiber patch cord To identify optical patch cords

labels
Ciena Optical connectors Provided with the circuit packs

dust covers
Ciena Universal fiber tool Required only for Procedure 10-5,

(NTN458TC) “Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter
housing”. Provided with the Muxponder
circuit pack and on the inside cover of the
5200 shelf. Can be used to disconnect or
connect the duplex LC fiber on the SFP
module.
Procedure list
Table 10-2 lists the procedures in this chapter.
Table 10-2
Connector cleaning procedures
Procedure Page Comments
10-1 Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors 10-7 Recommended

(simplex or duplex)
10-2 Cleaning MT-RJ connectors 10-11 Recommended
10-3 Cleaning MPO connectors 10-13 Recommended

10-4 Cleaning adapter housings and (when 10-15 Recommended
applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs
10-5 Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing 10-19 Recommended
10-6 Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end 10-25 Recommended to assess cleanliness of
optical fiber end after any of the above
cleaning procedures are performed.

Procedure 10-1
Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or
duplex)
Follow this procedure if you want to use a connector cleaning kit to clean SC,
LC or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex).
Requirements
Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 10-1
on page 10-5 to clean the connectors.
Precautions
Do not clean the adapter housing when the connector is attached to it.
If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit
pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this
procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the
fibers are disconnected.
CAUTION
Risk of damage and personal injury
Make sure that you review the caution and danger
warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter.
See “Precautions” on page 10-2.
—continued—


Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)
Action
Step Action
1 If the optical fiber Then

connectors are
inserted in a circuit make sure the circuit pack is not carrying traffic. If
pack there is traffic running on the circuit pack, and if
there is a protection path available, switch the
traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10
“Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected
network” in Provisioning and Operating
Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no protection
path available, advise your network administrator
before continuing the procedure. Disconnect the
fiber connectors from the adapter housing on the
circuit pack, then go to step 2.
are not inserted in a If the connectors have protection caps, remove the
circuit pack caps, then go to step 2.
2 If canned compressed gas is available in the cleaning tools, use it to remove

loose dust and dirt particles from the cylindrical and end-face surfaces of the
connector ferrule.
3 Decide which of the following cleaning methods to use:
a. If there are pre-moistened pads or alcohol bottle with lint-free cloth
available in the cleaning tools, go to step 4.
b. If there is a Cletop Reel available in the cleaning tools, go to step 10.
Note: In some situation of incrusted dust-particles, only the alcohol
cleaning method will work properly
4 Select one of the following steps:
a. Take a new lint-free cloth (TX-404) and fold it twice (long edge to long
edge); then go to step 5.
b. Open a pre-moistened wipe (TX-806) and go to step 6.
5 Use the plastic squeeze bottle to put one drop of alcohol on the center of the
lint free cloth.
6 Put the end face surface of the connector in the center of the lint-free cloth (or
wipe). Clean the rectangular face using a figure eight movement with the
cloth.
7 While the ferrule surfaces are still wet with solvent, fold a new, dry, lint free
cloth (TX-404) in half and use it to remove the remaining solvent.
—continued—


Step Action
8 See Procedure 10-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page
10-25 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the
ferrule is not clean, repeat step 4 through step 7 until no indication of
contamination remains.
9 To prevent new contamination.
If in step 1 of this Then
procedure
the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into their original location.
inserted in a circuit make sure the adapter housing is clean before
pack and a protection reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 10-4)
switch was performed Then reroute the traffic back to the original span
using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual,
force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in
Provisioning and Operating Procedures,
323-1701-310.
the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. Make
inserted in a circuit sure the adapter housing is clean before
pack but no reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 10-4).
protection switch was
performed
the optical fibers were cover the connector with a clean dust cap if you are
not inserted in a not going to use the connector immediately.
circuit pack
You have completed the cleaning procedure if you are using pre-moistened
pads of lint-free cloth with an alcohol bottle.
10 Gently wipe the end face of the ferrules with a clean segment of the Cletop
Reel cleaner, in the direction indicated on the cleaner. In the case of a
simplex connector, while wiping in this direction, slowly rotate the fiber
connector. Repeat this motion on the second wiping slot on the Cletop Reel.
ferrule is not clean, repeat step 10 until no indication of contamination
remains.
—continued—


Step Action
12 To prevent new contamination:

procedure
323-1701-310.
performed
circuit pack
—end—

Procedure 10-2
Cleaning MT-RJ connectors
Follow this procedure to clean MT-RJ connectors.
Requirements
Precautions
CAUTION
Action
Step Action

connectors are
inserted in a circuit pack make sure the circuit pack is not carrying traffic.
If there is traffic running on the circuit pack, and
if there is a protection path available, switch the
traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10
“Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected
Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no
protection path available, advise your network
administrator before continuing the procedure.
Disconnect the fiber connectors from the
adapter housing on the circuit pack, then go to
step 2.
are not inserted in a If the connectors have protection caps, remove
circuit pack the caps, then go to step 2.
—continued—


Cleaning MT-RJ connectors
Step Action
2 Use canned compressed gas to remove loose dust and dirt particles from the
rectangular and end-face surfaces of the connector ferrule.
a. Take a new lint-free cloth (TX-404) and fold it twice (long edge to long
edge); then go to step 4.
b. Open a pre-moistened wipe (TX-806) and go to step 5.
4 Use the plastic squeeze bottle to put one drop of alcohol on the center of the
lint free cloth.
5 Put the end face surface of the connector in the center of the lint-free cloth (or
wipe). Clean the rectangular face using a figure eight movement with the
cloth.
6 While the connector surface is still wet with alcohol, fold a new lint-free cloth
(TX-404) in half and place it on a clean, flat, smooth surface.
7 Hold the connector vertically and remove any remaining particles from the
connector by wiping the end face on the cloth in a figure eight movement.
procedure
323-1701-310.
performed
circuit pack
—end—

Procedure 10-3
Cleaning MPO connectors
Follow this procedure to clean MPO connectors.
Requirements
Precautions
CAUTION
Action
Step Action

connectors are
inserted in a circuit pack make sure the circuit pack is not carrying
traffic. If there is traffic running on the circuit
pack, and if there is a protection path
available, switch the traffic off the span using
Procedure 3-10 “Switching traffic off a span in
a path-protected network” in Provisioning and
Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. If
there is no protection path available, advise
your network administrator before continuing
the procedure. Disconnect the fiber
connectors from the adapter housing on the
circuit pack, then go to step 2.
are not inserted in a circuit If the connectors have protection caps,
pack remove the caps, then go to step 2.
—continued—


Cleaning MPO connectors
Step Action
2 Use canned compressed gas to remove loose dust and dirt particles from the
rectangular and end-face surfaces of the connector ferrule.
a. If you are cleaning a male MPO multifiber connector, get the NTT-AT
optical reel cleaner (part number 6226), then go to step 4.
b. If you are cleaning a female MPO multifiber connector, get the NTT-AT
optical reel cleaner (part number 6227), then go to step 4.
4 Press the green lever on the optical reel cleaner. The metal shutter on the top
of the cleaner will open, exposing the cleaning surface.
Note: Fresh cleaning material is exposed each time the green lever is
pressed.
5 Position the ferrule endface so that the fiber tips are in contact with the
cleaning surface on the reel cleaner.
6 Wipe the ferrule endface along the cleaning material in the direction shown
on the cleaner.
7 Release the green lever on the optical reel cleaner.
procedure
the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into their original location. make
switch was performed Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using
Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or
lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning
and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.
performed
circuit pack
—end—

Procedure 10-4
Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable)
optical connectors on circuit packs
Follow this procedure to clean adapter housings and connectors on circuit
pack or modules with optical connections.
Ciena recommends that you clean adapter housings and connectors on circuit
packs or modules with optical connections only
• during initial installation
• when you suspect performance is reduced because of contamination
Requirements
on page 10-5 to clean the adapter housings and connectors on circuit pack or
modules with optical connections.
Precautions
CAUTION
—continued—


Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs
Action
Step Action
1 If the circuit pack is Then

inserted in the shelf and there make sure the circuit pack is not carrying
are optical fibers connected to traffic. If there is traffic running on the
the faceplate circuit pack, and if there is a protection
path available, switch the traffic off the
span using Procedure 3-10 “Switching
traffic off a span in a path-protected
Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no
protection path available, advise your
network administrator before continuing
the procedure. Disconnect the fiber
connectors from the adapter housing on
the faceplate, then go to step 2.
not inserted in the shelf If the faceplate connectors have protection
caps, remove the caps, then go to step 3.
2 Unseat the circuit pack from the shelf. Release the lock latches at the top and
bottom of the circuit pack and slide it slightly out of the shelf.
3 If the adapter housing is for Then
SC, LC or FC connectors go to step 4
MT-RJ (receptacle MT-RJ go to step 11
device) connectors
MPO connectors this type of adapter housing does not
require cleaning. You have completed this
procedure.
4 Disconnect the patch cords inside the circuit pack that are going into the
adapter housing to be cleaned.
5 Use “Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)” on page
10-7 to clean the fiber connectors inside the circuit pack. See Procedure 10-6
“Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 10-25 to check the
cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean,
repeat the cleaning until no indication of contamination remains. After
completing the appropriate procedure, go to the next step of this procedure.
—continued—


Step Action
6 While the internal patch cords are still unconnected, carefully insert the tip of
a new, dry cleaning swab into the adapter housing.
Note 1: The cleaning swab size is smaller for LC adapter housing compared
to SC and FC adapter housing.
Note 2: Do not use solvent/alcohol for adapter housing cleaning as there is
no way to determine if residue is still present after cleaning, and the solvent
can get trapped in the many crevices of the adapter housing.
7 Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe the inside of the adapter housing.
8 Gently remove the tip of the swab and throw away the swab.
9 Repeat step 6 through step 8 for each connector adapter housing on the
circuit pack/module.
10 Reconnect the internal fiber patch cords inside the circuit pack (that were
disconnected and cleaned in step 4 and step 5). When completed, go to step
20.
11 To clean MT-RJ connectors, use “Cleaning MT-RJ connectors” on page
10-11, then go to the next step of this procedure.
12 Clean the MT-RJ adapter housing. Attach the extension tube supplied with
the canned compressed gas to the can nozzle.
13 Carefully insert the extension tube into the optical port of the receptacle
device.
14 Blow canned compressed gas into the optical port of the receptacle device to
remove loose dust or dirt particles.
15 Carefully remove the extension tube from the optical port of the receptacle
device.
16 Carefully insert the tip of a new, dry cleaning swab into the MT-RJ adapter
housing.
Note: Do not use solvent/alcohol for adapter housing cleaning as there is no
way to determine if residue is still present after cleaning, and the solvent can
get trapped in the many crevices of the adapter housing.
17 Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe as much as possible the inside of the
adapter housing.
18 Gently remove the tip of the swab and throw away the swab.
19 Repeat step 12 to step 18 if required.
Note: There is no better way to assess the cleanliness of a receptacle MT-RJ
device than reconnecting the fibers and verifying that the traffic is no longer
affected by dust particles in the receptacle. To do that, continue with step 20
in this procedure.
—continued—


Step Action

procedure
inserted in a circuit Then reroute the traffic back to the original span
pack and a protection using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual,
switch was performed force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in
323-1701-310.
the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location.
inserted in a circuit
pack but no
performed
the optical fibers were cover the faceplate connector with a clean dust cap
not inserted in a if you are not going to use the connector
circuit pack immediately.
—end—

Procedure 10-5
Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing
Use this procedure to clean the small form factor pluggable (SFP) and large
form factor pluggable (XFP) adaptor housing.
SFPs are supported on the

• Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH (MOTR 20G L2 ETH) circuit pack
• Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack
• Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack
• OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack
XFPs are supported on the

• MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack
• OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack
• OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack
• OTR 10G Quad with Encryption (QOTR/E 10G)
• OTR 10G Quad (QOTR 10G)
Note: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with

receptacles (cages) for two line-side XFPs. The QOTR/E 10G and QOTR
10G circuit packs are each equipped with receptacles for four XFPs. Port
1 and Port 2 are for the line side. Port 3 and 4 are for the client side or you
can provision them for the line side.
Ciena recommends that you clean SFP and XFP adapter housing only
• during initial installation
• when you suspect performance is reduced because of contamination
For a sample illustration of an SFP module on a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC

circuit pack, see Figure 10-3 on page 10-24. (The XFP module is larger than
the SFP module.) SFPs and XFPs are referred to as pluggables in this
procedure.
—continued—


ATTENTION
There is no guarantee that all the dirt present on the connector port of the
module will be removed and there is a risk of damaging the connector
end-face while performing this procedure.
Requirements
on page 10-5 to clean the adaptor housings and connectors on circuit pack or
modules with optical connections.
Precautions
If an optical fiber is connected to a pluggable, you must disconnect the fibers
from the pluggable before performing this procedure. If client protection is not
available on the subtending equipment, traffic will be lost on the pluggable
whose adapter housing you are cleaning.
CAUTION
warning notices listed in the introduction of this chapter.
—continued—


Action
Step Action
1 Determine the required task.

If the pluggable Then
whose fiber adaptor
housing requires
cleaning is
inserted in the circuit make sure that the pluggable is not carrying traffic.
pack and has optical • If the circuit pack is carrying traffic and client signal
fibers connected to it protection is available (on the subtending equipment),
contact your network administrator to switch the traffic
off the span.
• If there is no protection path available, inform your
network administrator before continuing the procedure.
Label the fiber connectors. Disconnect the fiber
connectors from the pluggable. To disconnect the
duplex LC fiber from the Muxponder circuit pack,
use the universal fiber tool provided with the circuit
pack. A universal fiber tool is not provided with the
OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra or OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE
circuit pack or the OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack
since fiber congestion is not a concern.
Then go to step 2.
inserted in the circuit go to step 2
pack and has no
optical fibers
connected to it
not inserted in the go to step 3
circuit pack
Removing the pluggable

2 Remove the pluggable by pulling the latch on the pluggable sideward (left or
right depending on the pluggable port number) to disengage the pluggable
from the port. Carefully pull the pluggable out of its receptacle without
affecting fibers connected to other pluggable ports on the circuit pack.
—continued—


Step Action
Cleaning the pluggable adapter housing

3 Attach the extension tube supplied with the canned compressed gas to the
can nozzle.
4 Remove LC male dust caps from the pluggable adaptor housing, if
applicable. Carefully insert the extension tube into the optical port of the
pluggable receptacle.
5 Blow canned compressed gas into the optical port of the pluggable receptacle
to remove loose dust or dirt particles.
6 Carefully remove the extension tube from the optical port of the receptacle
device.
7 Carefully insert the tip of a new, dry cleaning swab into the female adapter
housing on the pluggable module.
Note 1: Do not use solvent or alcohol to clean adapter housings. It is not
possible to determine if the solvent or alcohol has left a residue after cleaning.
The solvent or alcohol can get trapped in the crevices of the adapter housing.
Note 2: The majority of pluggables consist of two LC female adapter
housings. For details on pluggables, see the ordering information in Chapter
13 of Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.
8 Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe as much as possible of the inside of
the adapter housing.
9 Gently remove the tip of the swab. Discard the swab.
10 Repeat step 7 to step 9 for the remaining adaptor housing on the pluggable,
if applicable.
11 Repeat step 3 to step 10 if required.
Note: To assess the cleanliness of the pluggable receptacle device,
reconnect the fibers and verify that the traffic is no longer affected by dust
particles in the receptacle. Go to step 12.
—continued—


Step Action
Preventing contamination
procedure
the optical fibers were reinstall the pluggable into the circuit pack. For the
connected to the Muxponder circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad with
pluggable and a Encryption circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad circuit
protection switch was pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, OTR 10
performed on the client Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, or OTR 4 Gbit/s
subtending equipment FC circuit pack, follow Procedure 8-4, “Installing a
small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form
factor pluggable (XFP) module”.
Make sure that the fiber connectors are clean.
Then reconnect the fibers into their original location
on the pluggable (refer to the labels). For the
Muxponder, you can use the universal fiber tool to
reconnect the duplex LC fiber.
Contact your network administrator to reroute the
traffic back to the original span. If the traffic is
restored, the pluggable receptacle device (female
adaptor housing) is now clean.
no optical fibers were reinstall the pluggable into the circuit pack. For the
inserted into the Muxponder circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad with
pluggable and the Encryption circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad circuit
pluggable was installed pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, OTR 10
into the circuit pack Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, or OTR 4 Gbit/s
FC circuit pack, follow the Procedure 8-4,
“Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or
large form factor pluggable (XFP) module”.
If you are not going to use the pluggable connector
immediately, cover it with a clean male dust cap.
the pluggable was not cover the pluggable connector with a clean male
installed into the circuit dust cap, if you are not going to use the pluggable
pack connector immediately.
—end—

Figure 10-3
SFP module (on Muxponder 20G L2, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s, Muxponder 2.5
Gbit/s, or OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit packs)
OM3654.jpg
Note: The OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra and OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit
packs are equipped with one XFP module. The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit
pack is equipped with two line-side XFP modules. The QOTR/E 10G and
QOTR 10G circuit packs are each equipped with four XFPs. The XFP
module is larger than the SFP module.

Procedure 10-6
Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end
Follow this procedure to assess the cleanliness of the optical fiber end.
Requirements
Ciena recommends that you use the NOYES 200X Fiberscope listed in Table
10-1 on page 10-5 for this procedure.
Precautions
CAUTION
DANGER
Make sure that the optical fiber is disconnected from
any light source. The light source used in fiber-optic
devices can damage your eyes.
Action
Step Action
1 Before assessing the cleanliness of the optical fiber end, make sure the
following conditions are met:
• the fiber being inspecting does not carry traffic
• the fiber is not connected to any light source
If either of these conditions are not met, or if you are unsure, contact your next
level of support before going to the next step.
—continued—


Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end
Step Action
2 Make sure the fiber is not connected to a circuit pack or an adapter housing.
Note: Step 1 confirmed that the fiber, even if connected in a circuit pack or
adapter housing, is not carrying traffic or light, so you can safely disconnect
the fiber from the circuit pack in order to proceed with the inspection.
3 Select the appropriate fiberscope adapter for the type of optical fiber
connector you are inspecting (LC, SC, FC, MT-RJ or MPO).
4 Install the selected adapter on the fiberscope.
5 Insert the optical fiber connector into the fiberscope adapter.
6 Turn the fiberscope light to the ON position.
7 Look into the fiberscope and see Figure 10-4 on page 10-27 to adjust the
focus of the fiberscope so that you can identify the four inspection zones of
the optical fiber end. If you are inspecting MT-RJ or MPO connectors, select
one core and cladding in the connector for your focus. See Figure 10-5 on
page 10-28 for MPO connectors, or Figure 10-6 on page 10-28 for MT-RJ
connectors.
8 Compare the image of the optical fiber end with Figure 10-7 on page 10-29
and Figure 10-8 on page 10-29.
9 If the image is similar to Figure 10-7 on page 10-29, the optical fiber
connector is dirty. Repeat the appropriate cleaning procedure, and then
repeat this procedure to assess cleanliness.
Note: If the image remains dirty after repeated cleaning, replace the
assembly. Send the contaminated assembly to the next level of technical
support.
10 If the image is similar to Figure 10-8 on page 10-29, the optical fiber
connector is clean. If required, reconnect the fiber immediately on the circuit
pack connector where it is supposed to go (the adapter housing should
already have been cleaned using the appropriate procedure). If this fiber is
not to be connected immediately to a circuit pack, put a dust cap on the fiber
to protect it from contamination and damage.
Note: When the dust cap is removed from the fiber, the fiber end must be
cleaned again.
11 If you are inspecting MT-RJ or MPO connectors, select the next core and
cladding for your fiberscope focus and go back to step 8.
If you have inspected all the cores and claddings of the MT-RJ or MPO
connector, you have completed this procedure.
—end—

Figure 10-4
Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (SC or LC connector types)
OM2986t
Zone B: Cladding Zone D: Ferrule
Zone A: Core Zone C: Joint
Legend:
Zone A = Diameter of 25 microns - bigger than physical "core"
Zone B = Diameter of 115 microns - "cladding"
Zone C = Dark zone around the cladding - epoxy
Zone D = White band - ferrule

Figure 10-5
Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (MPO connector types)
OM1946t
Zone A
Zone B
Zone C
25 μm
105 μm
Zone D Fibers 125 μm
···
Ferrule Alignment
pins or holes
Figure 10-6
Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (MT-RJ connector types)
OM1947t
Zone A
Zone B
Zone C
25 μm
105 μm
Fibers 125 μm
Zone D
Ferrule Alignment
pins or holes

Figure 10-7
Dirty optical fiber end
OM3056p.jpg
Figure 10-8
Clean optical fiber end
OM3057p.jpg


11-1
Appendix A: Applying antioxidant

paste 11-
This chapter includes the following sections:
• “Overview” on page 11-1
• “Guidelines” on page 11-2
• “Illustrations” on page 11-3
— “Compression lugs and cables” on page 11-3
— “Surfaces” on page 11-5
Overview
Make sure that you follow the detailed steps regarding antioxidant paste
included in various procedures throughout Part 1 and Part 2 of this document.
As appropriate, apply antioxidant paste to

• any type of compression lug used with power, ground, and battery cables.
For the related illustrations, see “Compression lugs and cables” on page
11-3.
• the following surfaces
— system ground point on the rack
— ground terminal
— power input and return terminals
— battery input and return terminals
For the related illustrations, see “Surfaces” on page 11-5.

11-2 Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste
Guidelines
ATTENTION
Make sure that you follow the specific detailed steps included in the related
procedures in Part 1 and Part 2 of this document.
The following serves only as general guidelines.
Preparing a cable and compression lugs

1 Strip the required amount of insulation from the end of the cable to expose
the copper wire.
2 Apply antioxidant paste to the
— exposed copper wire of the cable, and
— inside the compression lug barrel
3 Insert the prepared exposed copper wire into the prepared compression
lug.
4 Crimp the compression lug to the cable as required.
5 Repeat step 1 to step 4 for the other end of the cable, as applicable.
Some cables have one compression lug pre-installed.
6 If you are working with a ground cable, see step 7 to step 12.
If you are working with a power cable, see step 13 to step 17.
If you are working with a battery cable, see step 18 to step 22.
Preparing compression lugs, ground terminal, system ground point, and securing a ground cable
7 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression
lug and the ground terminal.
8 Secure the compression lug to the ground terminal as required.
9 Prepare the system ground point as follows.
— If the system ground point has a metallic grounding strip, then lightly
coat antioxidant paste on the metallic grounding strip.
— If the system ground point does not have a strip metallic grounding,
– it is recommended to remove the paint on the sheet metal, and
– then lightly coat antioxidant paste on the prepared sheet metal
area.
10 Lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug on the
other end of the ground cable.
11 Place the prepared compression lug up against the metallic grounding
strip or the prepared sheet metal area, which connects to the system
ground point.
12 Secure the lugged ground cable in place to the system ground point as
required.
You have completed installing the lugged ground cable with the
antioxidant paste, as required.

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste 11-3
Preparing compression lugs, power input terminal and return terminal, and securing power
cables
lug and the input terminal on the power component.
14 Place the prepared compression lug up against the input terminal of the
power component.
15 Secure the lugged power cable in place to the input terminal of the power
component as required.
lug at the other end of the power cable. Secure this end of the power cable
to the appropriate power supply, as required.
17 Repeat step 13 to step 16 for the return power cable.
You have completed installing the lugged power cables with the
Preparing compression lugs, battery input terminal and return terminal, and securing battery
cables
lug and the input terminal on the battery.
19 Place the prepared compression lug up against the input terminal of the
battery.
20 Secure the lugged cable in place to the input terminal of the battery as
required.
lug at the other end of the battery cable. Secure this end of the battery
cable to the appropriate power supply, as required.
22 Repeat step 18 to step 21 for the return battery cable.
You have completed installing the lugged battery cables with the
Illustrations
This section includes illustrations related to the “Guidelines” on page 11-2.
• “Compression lugs and cables” on page 11-3
• “Surfaces” on page 11-5
Compression lugs and cables

This section includes the following:
• Figure 11-1, “Preparing a one-hole compression lug and cable” on page
11-4
• Figure 11-2, “Preparing a two-hole compression lug and cable” on page
11-4
• Figure 11-3, “Preparing a ring lug and cable” on page 11-5

Figure 11-1
Preparing a one-hole compression lug and cable
OM3591
Lug barrel
0.5 in. (13 mm)
Copper wire
Crimp-type
Insulated copper wire one-hole lug

0.5 in. (13 mm)
Figure 11-2
Preparing a two-hole compression lug and cable
OM3592
Lug barrel
0.5 in. (13 mm)
Copper wire
Crimp-type
two-hole lug


Figure 11-3
Preparing a ring lug and cable
OM3593
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug
Surfaces
This section includes the following:
• Figure 11-4, “Preparing a two-hole lug and system ground
point—Example” on page 11-6
• Figure 11-5, “Connecting the shelf ground to the rack frame ground” on
page 11-7
• Figure 11-6, “Preparing a two-hole lug and ground terminal” on page 11-7
• Figure 11-7, “Preparing a two-hole lug and power input terminal” on page
11-8
• Figure 11-8, “Two-hole lugs connected to battery input and return
terminals” on page 11-8

Figure 11-4
Preparing a two-hole lug and system ground point—Example
Lightly coat antioxidant paste

on compression lug and a
GND
Compression metallic grounding strip that
lug connects to system ground point
GND
If system ground point
does not have a
metallic grounding strip,
Lightly coat antioxidant paste then if necessary
on compression lug and a remove paint
metallic grounding strip that on sheet metal
connects to system ground point under lug
(recommended)
Note: Figure 11-4 also applies to a one-hole lug.

Figure 11-5
Connecting the shelf ground to the rack frame ground
OM1291p.tif
Figure 11-6
Preparing a two-hole lug and ground terminal
OM3608

compression lug and
ground terminal

Figure 11-7
Preparing a two-hole lug and power input terminal
OM3595

compression lug and
input terminal
Note: Figure 11-7 also applies to the power return terminal.
Figure 11-8
Two-hole lugs connected to battery input and return terminals
OM2707
BATT
RTN
Heat shrink
tubing

565/5100/5200
Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2
Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

All Rights Reserved.
Release 11.2
Publication: 323-1701-201
Document status: Standard
Document issue: 2
Document release date: September 2012
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at
www.ciena.com

323-1701-201 2 r11 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

323-1701-201 2 r11 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

565/5100/5200

Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,

See Part 1 for the following:

323-1701-201 - Issue 2 Standard

Ciena® Confidential and Proprietary

Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

About this document ix

Connecting power 6-1

Installing peripheral cables 7-1

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

7-13 Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel 7-59

Installing circuit packs 8-1

Fiber management 9-1

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Cleaning connectors 10-1

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

About this document 0

You are reading Part 2 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components,

Unless specifically stated otherwise, references to Release 11.2 in the

The 565/5100/5200 includes the following shelves:

Unless specified otherwise, 565/5100/5200 is used throughout the technical

Part 1 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components includes:

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Part 2 of Installing 5200 Shelves and Components includes:

This document contains the following information for the 5200:

Audience for this document

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Documentation library for the 565/5100/5200

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

The following roadmap lists the documents in the 565/5100/5200 library.

Planning a Installing, Managing, Maintaining and Supporting

Hardware Description Connection

Technical Testing and

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Before you begin

Item Quantity Supplied √

Phillips No. 1 screwdriver 1 no

Phillips No. 2 screwdriver 1 no

Flat head screwdriver (slotted) 3/32 in. 1 no

Flat head screwdriver, maximum 2/32” (2 mm) wide 1 no

Cable ties and lacing cord 2 no

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Table 6-1 (Continued)

Item Quantity Supplied √

NOMEX paper (to protect power cables over metallic 1 no

Ring lugs for 12 AWG copper wire as required no

Single-hole (No.6 screw) ring lugs for 12, 14, 16 or 18 8 no

–48 V 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (See as required no

AC power cable with an IEC 60320-C19 (male) 1 or 2 no

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Table 6-1 (Continued)

Item Quantity Supplied √

Ring lugs for 10 AWG cable wire (3U APRS DC power 2 or 4 no

AC power cable to connect an AC power source to the

10 AWG power cable assembly to connect from the DC

565/5100/5200 Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2

Table 6-2 lists the procedures in this chapter.

Procedure Page Comments √